Menu

Hebrews 3:6 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς ἐάνπερ τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος μέχρι τέλους βεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν.¶

BSAChristChristos [the Anointed One, Messiah] howeverde ashōs [the] Sonuhios [a child or descendant] overepi theho houseoikos [a physical dwelling or family] of Him,autos whosehos, hē houseoikos [a family or household of faith] areeimi we ourselvesegō if indeedean <the>ho [our] confidenceparrēsia [boldness or freedom in speaking] andkai theho boastkauchēma [a pride or glory, firmly established, stable] <the>ho of [our] hopeelpis [expectation or trust] untilmechri endtelos unshakablebebaios we may hold.katechō [to possess or have]

Word
Listen & take awayHebrews 3
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 6 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (katechō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Hebrews 3:6quick helps
In a sentenceThe author contrasts the faithfulness of Christ as the Son over God's house with the requirement for believers to hold firmly to their confidence and hope.
Who is speakingThe author of Hebrews, addressing the early Christian community.
Where we areThe context is a discussion of faithfulness in God's house, comparing Moses and Christ.
The hard wordπαρρησία
Take awayOur status as God's house depends on our steadfastness in faith.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectΧριστός verbεἰμί The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Hebrews 3:6

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Faithfulness of Christgenerated

5Now Moses was faithful as a servant in all God’s house, testifying to what would be spoken later.
6But Christ is faithful as the Son over God’s house. And we are His house, if we hold firmly to our confidence and the hope of which we boast.
7Therefore, as the Holy Spirit says: “Today, if you hear His voice,
8do not harden your hearts, as you did in the rebellion, in the day of testing in the wilderness,

Hebrews 3:6 emphasizes the faithfulness of Christ as the Son over God's house, contrasting Him with Moses, who served as a faithful servant. The passage encourages believers to recognize their identity as God's house, contingent upon their perseverance in faith and hope. This theme of faithfulness is central to the author's message, as it highlights the importance of maintaining confidence in God's promises.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Hebrews 1:2But in these last days He has spoken to us by His Son, whom He appointed heir of all things, and through whom He made the universe.
2Hebrews 4:14Therefore, since we have a great high priest who has passed through the heavens, Jesus the Son of God, let us hold firmly to what we profess.
3Psalm 2:6–7“I have installed My King on Zion, upon My holy mountain.”
4Isaiah 9:6–7For unto us a child is born, unto us a son is given, and the government will be upon His shoulders. And He will be called Wonderful Counselor, Mighty God, Everlasting Father, Prince of Peace.
5John 3:35–36The Father loves the Son and has placed all things in His hands.

The Key Word παρρησία, parrēsiagenerated

The Greek word παρρησία (parrēsia) means boldness or confidence in speaking. It is derived from πᾶς (all) and ῥῆσις (speech), indicating a sense of freedom in expression. This word appears in contexts where believers are encouraged to speak openly about their faith, as seen in Acts 4:13.

In this verse, it signifies the confidence believers should have in their relationship with God. The parsing indicates that it is a feminine noun in the accusative case, functioning as the object of the verb, thus showing the specific confidence that believers are to hold onto.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In the Berean Standard Bible, the term is rendered as confidence, which aligns with the translations of the KJV and WEB. The ASV and YLT choose boldness, indicating a slight variation in emphasis.

The translations differ specifically in the rendering of παρρησίαν: confidence is used by the BSB, KJV, and WEB, while boldness appears in the ASV and YLT.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The structure of the verse is governed by a main clause that introduces Christ's faithfulness, followed by a subordinate clause that describes the condition of being God's house. The finite verb ἐσμεν (are) serves as a linking verb connecting the subject ἡμεῖς (we) to the predicate, which includes the conditions for being part of God's house.

The sentence is complex, with a main clause and several subordinate clauses and phrases. The main clause asserts the identity of believers as God's house, while the conditional clause emphasizes the requirement of holding fast to confidence and hope.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In Hebrews 3:6, the term Χριστὸς (Christos) is used, which in the Septuagint corresponds to the Hebrew word מָשִׁיחַ (māšîaḥ), meaning 'anointed.' This connection emphasizes Christ's role as the anointed one over God's house.

The word οἶκον (oikos), meaning 'house,' translates the Hebrew בֵּית (bēṯ), which signifies a dwelling or household. This reinforces the idea of believers as part of God's household, contingent upon their steadfastness in hope, as indicated by the phrase ἐλπίδος (elpis), linked to תִּקְוָה (tiqvâ), meaning 'hope.'


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Hebrews 3:6 states that Christ is faithful as the Son over God's house, and we are part of that house if we hold firmly to our confidence and hope. This means that our relationship with God is secure as long as we remain steadfast in our faith.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that Christ is faithful as the Son over God's house?

It means that Christ has a unique and authoritative role over God's household, indicating His divine authority and faithfulness in fulfilling God's promises.

How can we hold firmly to our confidence and hope?

We can hold firmly by continually trusting in God's promises, engaging with Scripture, and participating in the community of believers.

What is the significance of being called God's house?

Being called God's house signifies our identity as part of His family and community, emphasizing our relationship with Him and with one another.

What does it mean to boast in our hope?

To boast in our hope means to express pride and confidence in the promises of God, recognizing that our hope is secure in Christ.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways can I demonstrate my confidence in God's promises in my daily life?
  2. How does understanding Christ's role as the Son over God's house impact my faith?
  3. What practices can help me hold firmly to my hope and confidence in challenging times?
  4. How can I encourage others to remain steadfast in their faith and hope?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church Fathers reference this verse to highlight the distinction between Christ and Moses, emphasizing Christ's greater honor.

Ephrem the SyrianCOMMENTARY ON THE EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS c. 306–373
But since he said, “as Moses,” do not think that he is as Moses; “the glory of this” high priest “is greater than that of Moses inasmuch as the maker of a house has greater honor than the house.” Similarly the honor of the Lord and the Son…
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 3 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Hebrews 5 c. 347–407
"But Christ as a Son over His own house." Perceivest thou how he separates the thing made and the maker, the servant and the son? Moreover He indeed enters into His Father's property as a master, but the other as a servant. "Whose" (i.e.
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 3 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Hebrews 5 c. 347–407
"But Christ as a Son." The one takes care of the property of others, but this One of His own. "And the rejoicing of the hope." Well said he "of the hope." For since the good things were all in hope,
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 3 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Hebrews 3:6 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

But Christ as a Son over his own house,.... As Moses was not, though the Jews say that he was מאריה דבית (a) and בעל הבית (b), "lord and master of the house"; yea, and בן בית, "the Son of the house"

Read John Gill on Hebrews 3 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

But Christ as a son over his own house; whose house are we, if we hold fast the confidence and the rejoicing of the hope firm unto the end. But Christ - was and is faithful (Hebrews 3:2).

Read Robert Jamieson on Hebrews 3 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

But Christ as a son over his own house; the anointed gospel Prophet by God the Father, , who was eminently faithful and true to his trust, who is Heir and Lord of all, and therefore by the law of nature and nations is above the best servant, . Who is the Head and Lord over his own church, which he purchased by his own blood, , and built for himself. Moses was in it but a servant, fulfilling his Master’ s will and pleasure, and ordering all in it agreeable to it. Whose house are we; the Hebrews’ personal privilege, as well as the Prophet’ s excellency, persuading and obliging them to know by consideration what is represented to them, and to influence their hearts to a perseverance under his…

Read Matthew Poole on Hebrews 3 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

6 But Christ as a son over his own house; whose house are we, if we hold fast the confidence and the rejoicing of the hope firm unto the end. Ver. 6. Whose house are we] And he is bound (by his own promise) to repair. He also is our dwelling house, Psalms 90:1., and by the civil law, De domo sun nemo extrahi debet, aut in ius vocari. A man’ s house is his castle. If we hold fast] See here a just description of the invisible Church of Christ.

Read John Trapp on Hebrews 3 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(6) But Christ as a son over his own house.—Rather, over His house. Throughout this passage (Hebrews 3:2; Hebrews 3:5-6) “His house” must be taken in the sense of the quotation, as the house of God. Whereas Moses was faithful as a servant in this house of God, Christ was faithful as a son set over His Father’s house. The antithesis is complete: the one is a servant for witness, the other a Son having a natural right to rule. The concluding words in Hebrews 3:5 have no formal answer here, but the contrast is not the less distinctly expressed. The name Christ (which here occurs for the first time) is in this Epistle never a mere name: it contains implicitly the thought that all that to which…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Hebrews 3 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 6. But Christ as a Son over his own house] Moses was faithful as a servant IN the house; Jesus was faithful, as the first-born Son, OVER the house of which he is the Heir and Governor. Here, then, is the conclusion of the argument in reference to Christ's superiority over Moses. Moses did not found the house or family, Christ did; Moses was but in the house, or one of the family, Christ was over the house as its Ruler; Moses was but servant in the house, Christ was the Son and Heir; Moses was in the house of another, Christ in his own house. It is well known to every learned reader that the pronoun αυτου, without an aspirate, signifies his simply; and that with the aspirate, αυτου, it…

Read AdamClarke on Hebrews 3 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

6. as a Son over his own house] Rather, “over His (i.e. God’s) house.” In the words “Servant” and “Son “we again (as in Hebrews 1:5; Hebrews 1:8) reach the central point of Christ’s superiority to Moses. The proof of this superiority did not require more than a brief treatment because it was implicitly involved in the preceding arguments.whose house are we] This is a metaphor which the writer may well have learnt in his intercourse with St Paul (2 Corinthians 6:16; Ephesians 2:21-22. Comp. 1 Peter 2:5).the confidence] Literally, “our cheerful confidence,” especially of utterance, as in Hebrews 10:19; Hebrews 10:35. The word rendered “confidence” in Hebrews 3:14 is different. This boldness…

Read Cambridge on Hebrews 3 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

But Christ as a Son over his own house - He is not a servant. To the whole household or family of God he sustains the same relation which a son and heir in a family does to the household.

Read Albert Barnes on Hebrews 3 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

But Christ is faithful as the Son over God’s house. And we are His house, if we hold firmly to our confidence and the hope of which we boast.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

but Christ is faithful as a Son over his house. We are his house, if we hold fast our confidence and the glorying of our hope firm to the end.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

But Christ is faithful as the Son over God’s house. And we are His house, if we hold firmly to the end our confidence and the hope of which we boast.

NETBNew English Translation2006

But Christ is faithful as a son over God’s house. We are of his house, if in fact we hold firmly to our confidence and the hope we take pride in.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

But Christ as a son over his own house; whose house are we, if we hold fast the confidence and the rejoicing of the hope firm unto the end.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

but Christ as a son, over his house; whose house are we, if we hold fast our boldness and the glorying of our hope firm unto the end.

RVARevised Version, American1894

but Christ as a son, over his house; whose house are we, if we hold fast our boldness and the glorying of our hope firm unto the end.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

But Christ as a son over his own house: whose house are we, if we hold fast the confidence, and the rejoicing of the hope firm to the end.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

But Christ is as the Sonne, ouer his owne house, whose house we are, if we holde fast that confidence and that reioycing of that hope vnto the ende.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

but Christ, as Son over his house, whose house are we, if indeed we hold fast the boldness and the boast of hope firm to the end.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and Christ, as a Son over his house, whose house are we, if the boldness and the rejoicing of the hope unto the end we hold fast.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

but Christ, as a Son over His house, whose house we are, if we hold fast the boldness and the rejoicing of the hope to the end.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

But Christ is faithful as a Son who is in charge of God's house. We are his house if we hold fast to our courage and the hope of which we boast.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

But Christ as the Son in his own house: which house are we, if we hold fast the confidence and glory of hope unto the end.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

But Christ is a son, in charge of God's house. And we are God's house as long as we hold on with confidence to the hope we boast we believe in.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

But Christ as a son, over his house; whose house are we, if we keep our hearts fixed in the glad and certain hope till the end.

Word by word, the decisions they made

παρρησίανparrēsia [our] confidence G3954 2 different renderings
confidenceBSB DRA FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB WEB
boldnessASV DBY LSV RVA YLT

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶAndclauseμὲνindeedclausesubjectΜωϋσῆςMosespredicateπιστὸς[was] faithfulprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνinnoun phraseὅλῳallnoun phraseτῷthenoun phraseοἴκῳhouseαὐτοῦof Himprepositional phrase · adverbialὡςasθεράπωνa servantprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςuntonoun phraseμαρτύριονa testimonynoun phraseτῶνof the thingsclauseverbλαληθησομένωνgoing to be spokenδὲhoweverclausesubjectΧριστὸςChristprepositional phrase · adverbialὡςasυἱὸς[the] Sonprepositional phrase · adverbialἐπὶovernoun phraseτὸνthenoun phraseοἶκονhousenoun phraseαὐτοῦof Himclausenoun phrase · predicateοὗwhoseοἶκόςhouselinking verbἐσμενaresubjectἡμεῖςweclauseἐὰνif indeedclausenoun phrase · objectnoun phraseτὴν[our]παρρησίανconfidenceκαὶandnoun phraseτὸthenoun phraseκαύχημαboastnoun phraseτῆςof [our]ἐλπίδοςhopeprepositional phrase · adverbialμέχριuntoτέλους[the] endadverbialβεβαίανfirmverbκατάσχωμενwe should hold

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Christus vero tamquam filius in domo sua : quæ domus sumus nos, si fiduciam, et gloriam spei usque ad finem, firmam retineamus.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܡܫܝܚܐ ܕܝܢ ܐܝܟ ܒܪܐ ܥܠ ܒܝܬܗ ܘܐܝܬܘܗܝ ܒܝܬܗ ܚܢܢ ܐܢ ܥܕܡܐ ܠܚܪܬܐ ܢܐܚܘܕ ܓܠܝܘܬ ܐܦܐ ܘܫܘܒܗܪܐ ܕܣܒܪܗ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς ἐάνπερ τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν.¶

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς ἐάνπερ τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν.¶

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν.¶

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος μέχρι τέλους βεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν.¶

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος μέχρι τέλους βεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν.¶

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν.¶

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς ἐάνπερ τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος μέχρι τέλους βεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν.¶

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Χριστὸς δὲ ὡς υἱὸς ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς ἐάνπερ τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος μέχρι τέλους βεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν.¶

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
οὗ whoseNA28, NA27, Tyn, WH, Treg, TR, ByzSBL
ἐάνπερ if indeedNA28, NA27, TR, ByzSBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
μέχρι untilWH, Treg, TR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, Tyn
τέλους endWH, Treg, TR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, Tyn
βεβαίαν unshakableWH, Treg, TR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, Tyn

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Hebrews 3:6ΧριστόςChristChristΧριστόςδέhoweverhoweverδέὡςasasὡςυἱός[the] Son[the] Sonυἱόςἐπίoveroverἐπίthetheοἶκοςhousehouseοἶκοςαὐτόςof Him,of Him,αὐτόςὅςwhosewhoseὅςοἶκοςhousehouseοἶκοςεἰμίareareεἰμίημειςwe ourselvewe ourselvesημειςἐάνif indeedif indeedἐάν<the><the>παρρησία[our] confi[our] confidencπαρρησίακαίandandκαίthetheκαύχημαboastboastκαύχημα<the><the>ἐλπίςof [our] hoof [our] hopeἐλπίςμέχριuntiluntilμέχριτέλοςendendτέλοςβέβαιοςunshakableunshakableβέβαιοςκατέχωwe may holdwe may hold.κατέχωχρίωv. I anoinv. I anointχρίωὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςεἰCond. ifCond. ifεἰπᾶςAdj all, tAdj all, the whπᾶςκαυχάομαιv. I boastv. I boast, gloκαυχάομαιμῆκοςn.n. lengtn.n. lengthμῆκοςκατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗφόροςn.m. a taxn.m. a tax, triφόροςβάσιςn.f. the fn.f. the footβάσιςμέχριAdv as farAdv as far as, μέχριπροσευχήn.f. prayen.f. prayer, a προσευχήἸσραήλProp.n. IsProp.n. IsraelἸσραήλβέβαιοςAdj firm, Adj firm, steadβέβαιοςκατέχωv. I hold v. I hold fast,κατέχω
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Hebrews 3:6

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
ΧριστὸςChristos Christ G5547 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
529× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Christ means anointed, referring to Jesus as the Messiah, as seen in Luke 2:11 and John 1:41.
Amplified meaning
the Anointed One, Messiah
Tyndale gloss
Christ
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

Χριστός (Christos) means 'anointed' and refers specifically to the Messiah, a title used for Jesus in the New Testament. The term is derived from the verb χρίω (to anoint) and appears in various contexts, including references to anointing oil and the anointed kings of Israel. It is used substantively as 'the Christ' in many New Testament verses, such as Matthew 2:4 and John 1:20.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν

(< χρίω),

[in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;]

as adj.,

of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Le 21:10);

of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Le 4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, II Mac 1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (I Ki 2:10, Ps 2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Lk 2:11, 26 Jo 1:41, Ac 2:36 4:26, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Χριστός, τή, -dv, (xpiw), Sept. for mw, anointed: 6 | ἱερεὺς ὁ χριστός, Lev. iv. 5; vi. 22; of χριστοὶ ἱερεῖς, 2 Mace. i. 10; the patriarchs are called, substantively, of χριστοὶ θεοῦ, Ps. civ. (cv.) 15; the sing. 6 χριστὸς τοῦ κυρίου (177 Mw) in the O. T. often of the king of Israel (see χρίσμα), as 1 S. ii. 10, 35; [xxiv. 11; xxvi. 9, 11, 23]; 2.5. 1. 14; Ps. ii. 2; xvii. (xviii.) 51; Hab. iii. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus, as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1; of the coming king whom the Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the author of their highest felicity: the name ὁ χριστός (mw, Chald. xmw>) is not found in the O. T. but is first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [ef. Schodde’s note]; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which some have attempted to prove that the section containing these passages is of Christian origin are not convincing [cf. υἱὸς τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Χριστός (Christos) — Christ.

χριστός, ή, όν,

(χρίω) to be rubbed on, used as ointment or salve, opposed to πιστός, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἔλαιον τὸ χ. anointing oil, [LXX]

II. of persons, anointed, ὁ ἱερεύς ὁ χ. [LXX]

II.2. especially of the Kings of Israel, ὁ χ. Κυρίου[LXX]; plural, of the patriarchs, [LXX]

II.3. in NT, ὁ χ. the Messiah, [NT]; then used as proper name of Jesus, Ἰησοῦς χ. [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Χριστός

Christos

from 5548; anointed, i.e. the Messiah, an epithet of Jesus:--Christ.

see GREEK for 5548

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Χριστός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

anointed, the Messiah, the Christ

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Χριστός Christos 529x

pr. anointed; ὁ Χριστός, the Christ, the Anointed One, i.e. Μεσσίας, the Messiah, Mt. 1:16, 17; Jn. 1:20, 25, 42; meton. Christ, the word or doctrine of Christ, 2 Cor. 1:19; 21; Eph. 4:20; Christ, a truly Christian frame of doctrine and affection, Rom. 8:10; Gal. 4:19; Christ, the Church of Christ, 1 Cor. 12:12; Christ the distinctive privileges of the Gospel of Christ, Gal. 3:27; Phil.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Christ

Anointed, the Greek translation of the Hebrew word rendered “Messiah” (q.v.), the official title of our Lord, occurring five hundred and fourteen times in the New Testament. It denotes that he was anointed or consecrated to his great redemptive work as Prophet, Priest, and King of his people. He is Jesus the Christ (Acts 17:3; 18:5; Matt. 22:42), the Anointed One. He is thus spoken of by Isaiah (61:1), and by Daniel (9:24-26), who styles him “Messiah the Prince.”

The Messiah is the same person as “the seed of the woman” (Gen. 3:15), “the seed of Abraham” (Gen. 22:18), the “Prophet like unto Moses” (Deut.…

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome Polycarp Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.137c. AD 75–95

τὸ δὲ ἄλλο μέχρι τῆς στέγης χριστὸν ἦν καὶ καταπεποικιλμένον χρώμασι καὶ βαφαῖς.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement preface.1c. AD 96

Ἡ ἐκκλησία τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ παροικοῦσα Ῥώμην τῆ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ τῇ παροικούσῃ Κόρινθον, κλητοῖς ἡγιασμένοις ἐν θελήματι θεοῦ διὰ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD

τὸ μῆκος πήχεις πέντε πλάτος πήχεις τέσσαρες ἥμισυ· βάψον δὲ εἰς τὸ βῆλον σημεῖον Χριστοῦ … … ἐπάνω τ … . προσαγορεύω πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς κατʼ ὄνομα ἀπὸ μικρῶν

P.Petra 3 29Petra (Tertia Palaestina Salutaris)AD 582–AD 592

r βασιλείας τοῦ δεσπότου ἡμῶν Φλαουίου Μαυρικίου πιστοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ ἡμέρου μεγίστου εὐεργέτου καὶ αὐτοκράτορος Αὐγούστου ἔτους … … … … … … ημερ

P.Petra 3 31Petra (Tertia Palaestina Salutaris)AD 582–AD 592

βασιλείας τοῦ δεσπότου ἡμῶν Φλαουίου Μαυρικίου Τιβερίου πιστοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ ἡμέρου μεγίστου εὐεργέτου καὶ αὐτοκράτορος Αὐγούστου ἔτους … … … … … … τήνδε

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
δὲde however G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέhowever2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
ὡςhōs as G5613 Adverb
502× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means as or when, showing a comparison or timing. It's used in many verses, like Mark 4:26 and 1 Corinthians 3:15, to show how things are done. It helps explain how or when something happens.
Tyndale gloss
as/when
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὡς is an adverb and conjunction derived from the relative pronoun ὅς. It is used in various contexts to mean 'as,' 'like,' or 'when,' and can indicate manner, comparison, or time. In the New Testament, it appears frequently to express similarity or to introduce clauses, such as in comparisons or temporal phrases. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.

As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as;

with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mk 4:26, I Co 3:15, Eph 5:28, Ja 2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Ac 8:32, I Co 7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), c. nom., Mt 6:29, al.; c. acc., Mt 19:19, Mk 12:31, al.; c. prep., Mt 26:55, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὡς [ Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 ὥς; cf. W. 462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 494

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὡς. Ι. = “45: P Goodsp Cairo 44 (ii/B.c.) (= Selections, Ῥ- 24) εἰ tppwoar . .. εἴη dv ὡς αἱρούμεθα, “if you are well, it will be as we desire,” BGU I. 1637 (A.D. 108) καὶ yap ἄλλοι ὡς πληγέντες ὑπὸ αὐτοῦ ἀναφόριον δεδώκασι, “for others have given information (from time to time) ἃ5 having been assaulted by him,” P Flor I. 5618 (A.p. 234) ὡς καθήκει, and BGU IV. το. 1 (iv/y A.D.) κα]ταβληθῆναι ὡς φονέα. 2. = “that,” ‘ how,” after verbs of saying, thinking, etc.: P Tebt I. τοῦ (B.c. 119) φρόντισον ὡς τὰ τῆς ὑποσχέσεως ἐκπληρωθήσεται, “take care that the terms of his agreement are fulfilled” (Edd.), and P Tebt II. 4101? (i/A.D.) μν[ἤ]σθητι o[s] ἐν τῷ Τρ[ιστόμῳ pe ἐφιλοτ[ιυἹμοῦ σὺν ἐμοὶ μεῖναι, ‘remember how zealous you were at Tristomos to remain with me” (Fdd.). 3. Ὁ. ind. with dy, as in Σ Cor 125, cf. P Par 4615 (B.C. 152) ὡς ἂν εὐκαιρήσω, παραχρῆμα παρέσομαι πρός σε. 4. c. conj. with…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὡς (hōs) — as/when.

ὡς:—

Summary:

__A as adverb of Manner.

__A.Aa ὧς and ὥς (with accent), so, thus.

__A.Ab ὡς (without accent) of the Relat. pronoun ὅς, as.

__A.Ac ὡς Relat. and Interrog., how.

__A.Ad ὡς temporal, when.

__A.Ae ὡς Local, where,

__B ὡς, as CONJUNCTION.

__C,D various usages. adverb of Manner:

__A.Aa ὥς, Demonstr., ={οὕτως}, so, thus, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Ionic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὥς simply ={οὕτως}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.2 καὶ ὧς even so, nevertheless, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδ᾽ ὧς not even so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] are used in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἂν ὧς, εἴπερ μέλει σοι, ἀπόστειλόν μοί τινα [Refs 4th c.AD+]; δουλεύων καθὼς καὶ ὧς [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Thess. καὶ οὗς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; for this phrase the accentuation ὧς[Refs 2nd…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὡς

hos

probably adverb of comparative from 3739; which how, i.e. in that

manner (very variously used, as follows):--about, after (that),

(according) as (it had been, it were), as soon (as), even as (like),

for, how (greatly), like (as, unto), since, so (that), that, to wit,

unto, when(-soever), while, X with all speed.

see GREEK for 3739

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὡς

Adv

as, like as, how, while, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὡς hōs 504x

conjunction formed from the relative pronoun ὅς, used as a comparative part. and conj., as, correlatively, Mk. 4:26; Jn. 7:46; Rom. 5:15; as, like as, Mt. 10:16; Eph. 5:8; according as, Gal. 6:10; as, as it were, Rev. 8:8; as, Lk. 16:1; Acts 3:12; before numerals, about, Mk. 5:13; conj. that, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὡς thus, as, so that, since

A. ADVERB of Manner, either ὥς (with accent) Demonstr. so, thus, Lat. sic;— or ὡς (without accent) Relat. as, Lat. ut. B. ὡς, as CONJUNCTION. C, D. various usages.

of Manner:

ὥς, Demonstr. = οὕτως, so, thus, Lat. sic, Hom., Hdt.; rare in attic:— καὶ ὥς, even so, nevertheless, οὐδ᾽ ὥς, μηδ᾽ ὥς, not even so, in no wise, Hom., Soph.

in Comparisons, ὥς . . , ὡς . . , so . . as . . , Lat. sic . . ut . . , Il., Plat.

thus, for instance, Od.

ὡς, Relat., as, Lat. ut, first in Hom.; οὕτως ὡς, Lat. sic ut; but the antec. is often omitted: similes are commonly introduced by ὡς ὅτε, ὡς δ᾽ ὅτε, where ὅτε often seems superfluous, ἤριπε δ᾽, ὡς ὅτε πύργος [ἤριπε] Il.:—this ὡς takes the accent at the end of a clause or when it follows the word dependent on it; θεὸς δ᾽ ὣς τίετο δήμῳ Il.; οἱ δὲ φέβοντο, βόες ὥς…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

az: Conj. and adverb (usually Greek hos hosper, kathos), designating:

(1) Likeness: (a) between nouns (Ge 3:5; Jud 6:5; Php 2:8; Heb 11:27,29); (b) between verbs (Lu 6:36; Joh 5:30; 1Co 10:7); (c) between adjectives (1Co 15:48).

(2) Limitation (with respect to a particular aspect or relation) (1Pe 4:15,16).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%as
as60% · 310×like16% · 84×when8% · 41×how4% · 21×about4% · 20×other renderings6% · 33×other renderings1% · 7×

516 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 22 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial31%predicate12%object4%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 502 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
πρόσωπονthe face, counteπούςthe footδιδάσκωI teach
σύ
πλησίονnear, nearby, a καρδίαthe heart, innerἀποστέλλωI send forth, se
καίand, even, also, nam
πολύςmuch, many, ofteαὐτόςλαόςa people, the cr
ἀλλάbut, except
γαμίζωI give in marriaθέλωI will, wish, deφανερῶςclearly, openly
εἰμίI am, exist
ὥραan hour, seasonὅτιthat, since, becοὐNeg
ὡςas502×
what comes after →
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἥλιοςthe sun, sunlighφῶςlight, a source
δέbut, on the other ha
πληρόωI fill, fulfill,γίνομαιI come into beinἀκούωI hear, listen
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐνἐγώ
φωνήa sound, noise, voic
ὕδωρwaterβροντήthunderἐν
ἐν
Article theοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaκρυπτόςhidden, secret

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὡς · 502× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John 2 Corinthians 1 Peter Hebrews Mark Romans Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
υἱὸςuhios [the] Son G5207 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
376× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, this word means a son or child, used in passages like Matthew 10:37 and Luke 1:13. It can also refer to animals, as in a foal. The word is used to describe family relationships and is an important concept in biblical genealogy.
Amplified meaning
a child or descendant
Tyndale gloss
son
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word υἱός (i.e., *huios*) means 'son' and is used broadly to refer to biological offspring, descendants, or figuratively to denote kinship. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including titles for Jesus, such as 'Son of God' and 'Son of Man', as well as in expressions of spiritual relationships, like 'sons of God' referring to believers. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

υἱός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX very freq. and nearly always for בֵּן, Ge 4:17, al.; for בַּר, Da LXX TH 7:13, al.; etc. ;],

a son;

in the ordinary sense: Mt 10:37, Mk 9:17, Lk 1:13, al. mult.; omitted with the art. of origin (WM, § 30, 3; Bl., §35, 2), τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, Ac 13:22 (LXX); also c. gen. anarth. (cl.), Σώπατρος Πύρρου Βεροιαῖος, Ac 20:4; c. adj., προτότοκος, Lk 2:7; μονογένης, Lk 7:12; opp. to νόθος, Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

υἱός (uhios) — son.

υἱός, ὁ

(written ϝηιός in Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. [Refs 6th c.BC+] —in earlier _Attic dialect_ and other Inscrr. inflected as a ῠ-stem (like πῆχυς), _nominative_ υἱύς (written huihus)[Refs]; dative υἱεῖ: dual υἱεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+], written ηυιε in [Refs 5th c.BC+] are rejected by [Refs 2nd c.AD+], Thom.Mag.p.367 R., as not Attic dialect, though the two latter forms are used by later writers (as υἱέα [Refs 3rd c.BC+] is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is mentioned as a form that would be regular by [Refs] —Homer uses _nominative_ υἱός (very frequently); genitive υἱοῦ only in [Refs 8th c.BC+], elsewhere υἱέο; dative υἱέϊ or υἱε; accusative υἱέα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: plural, nominative υἱέες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative υἱοῖσι (ν) only [Refs 8th c.BC+], belongs solely to later Epic dialect poets, as [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (υιυις lapis); accusative υἱύν [Refs]; genitive υἱέος [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

υἱός

huios

apparently a primary word; a "son" (sometimes of animals), used very

widely of immediate, remote or figuratively, kinship:--child, foal,

son.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

υἱός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a son, descendent

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

υἱός hyios 377x

a son, Mt. 1:21, 25; 7:9; 13:55 freq.; a legitimate son, Heb. 12:8; a son artificially constituted, Acts 7:21; Heb. 11:24; a descendant, Mt. 1:1, 20; Mk. 12:35; in NT the young of an animal, Mt. 21:5; a spiritual son in respect of conversion or discipleship, 1 Pet. 5:13; from the Hebrew, a disciple, perhaps, Mt. 12:27; a son as implying connection in respect of membership, service…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

υἱός υἱός, οῦ, ὁ, etc. A son, Lat. filius, Hom., etc.; υἱὸν ποιεῖσθαί τινα to adopt him as a son, Aeschin.; υἱεῖς ἄνδρες grown up sons, Dem.:—rarely of animals, NTest.

periphr., υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, for Ἀχαιοί, Il.; cf. παῖς.

Hom. sometimes makes the 1st syll. short, as if it were ὑός.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

The term "son" is used in Scripture language to imply almost any kind of descent or succession, as ben shanah , "son of a year," i.e. a year old; ben kesheth , "son of a bow," i.e. an arrow. The word bar is often found in the New Testament in composition, as Bar-timaeus.

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Sometimes denotes a grandson, or any remote descendant, Ge 29:5 2Sa 19:24. At other times a son by adoption is meant, Ge 48:5; or by law, Ru 4:17; or by education, 1Sa 3:6 20:35; or by conversion, as Titus was Paul’s "son father the common faith," Tit 1:4. And again it denotes a mental or moral resemblance, etc., Jud 19:22 Ps 89:6 Isa 57:3 Ac 13:10. In a…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ FIGURATIVE

Of a person' s relation to God Ex 4:22

See ADOPTION

See GOD, FATHERHOOD OF

See JESUS, SON OF GOD

See JESUS, SON OF MAN

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
80%son
son80% · 307×sons19% · 71×other renderings1% · 4×

382 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject35%predicate25%object20%adverbial15%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 376 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,ὁράωI see, look upon
εἰμίI am, exist
θεόςGod, a godὅςαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτίκτωI bear, bring foεἰCond
εἰCond
αὐτόςσεαυτοῦδιάβολοςslanderous, the
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becποιέωI do, makeκαίand, even, also,
υἱός[the] Son376×
what comes after →
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a godνυμφώνa bridal chamber
αὐτός
Article theἸησοῦςJesusεἰμίI am, exist
ἐγώ
Article theεἰμίI am, existεἷςone
καίand, even, also, nam
καλέωI call, invite, Article theὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theθεόςGod, a godλέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceυἱός · 376× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Mark Hebrews 1 John Acts Galatians Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament20 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.48c. AD 40

„ἐὰν δὲ γένωνται ἀνθρώπῳ δύο γυναῖκες, μία αὐτῶν ἠγαπημένη καὶ μία αὐτῶν μισουμένη, καὶ τέκωσιν αὐτῷ καὶ γένηται υἱὸς πρωτότοκος τῆς μισουμένης, ...

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.63c. AD 75–95

Ἀνώχου δὲ Ἰαράδης υἱὸς ἦν, ἐκ δὲ τούτου Μαρουῆλος, οὗ γίνεται παῖς Μαθουσάλας, τοῦ δὲ Λάμεχος, ᾧ παῖδες ὑπῆρξαν ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ἐκ δύο γυναικῶν αὐτῷ φύντες Σελλᾶς καὶ Ἄδας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Adl. 12Pathyris102 BC

τρεῖς · γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων, τὴν δʼ ἄλλην

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

, ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων, τὴν δʼ ἄλλην

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

νότου γῆ Πατήφιος τοῦ Πεμσάϊος βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος ἧς κρατοῦσιν οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
ἐπὶepi over G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%upon
upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m
πίπτωI fall, fall under
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,
ἐπίover886×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theὅςκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
οἶκονoikos house G3624 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
114× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A house refers to a physical dwelling, like a home, as mentioned in Acts 2:2 and Matthew 9:6. It can also represent a family or a community, whether related by blood or not. The term is used to describe the temple in Matthew 21:13.
Amplified meaning
a physical dwelling or family
Tyndale gloss
house: home
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

οἶκος (oikos) primarily means a house or dwelling, but it also extends to refer to a household or family. In the New Testament, it is used in various contexts, including literal homes (Acts 2:2) and metaphorical uses such as the Church (1 Peter 2:5). The word can denote a sanctuary or temple, reflecting its broader significance in both Greek and Hebrew traditions.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οἶκος, -οῦ, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for בַּיִת, also for הֵיכָל, אֹהֶל, etc.;]

prop., a house, dwelling: Ac 2:2 19:16; c. gen. poss., Mt 9:6, 7, Mk 2:11, Lk 1:23, al.; c. gen. attrib., ἐμπορίου, Jo 2:16; προσευχῆς, Mt 21:13, al.; of a sanctuary (Hdt., Eur.): οἶ. τ. θεοῦ, of the tabernacle, Mt 12:4, al.; the temple, Mt 21:13, al.; metaph. of a city: Mt 23:38, Lk 13:35; of the body, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οἶκος, -ου, ὁ, [ef. Lat. views, Eng. ending -wich; Curtius § 95], fr. Hom. down; Sept. in numberless places for 13, also for ‘on a palace, mk a tent, ete.; 1. a house; a. strictly, an inhabited house [differing thus fr. δόμος the building]: Acts ii. 2; xix. 16; τινός, Mt. ix. 6 sq.; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38; Lk. i. 23, 40, 56; viii. 39, 41, εἴς. ; ἔρχεσθαι eis οἶκον, to come into a house (domum venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19); εἰς τὸν οἶκον, into the (i. 6. his or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, in the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20; ἐν οἴκῳ, at home, 1 Co. xi. 34; xiv. 35; of εἰς τὸν οἶκον (see eis, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61; κατ᾽ οἶκον, opp. to ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, in a household assembly, in private, [R. V. at home; see κατά, II. 1 d.], Acts ii. 46; ν. 42; κατ᾽ οἴκους, opp. to δημοσίᾳ, in private houses, [A. V. from house to house; see κατά, II. 3 a.], Acts xx. 20; κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οἶκος. As illustrating the NT conception of the otkos πνευματukds and the οἶκος τοῦ θεοῦ Thieme (p. 31) refers not only to the place which ‘‘the house of God” had in Jewish religion, but also to the ‘‘holy houses” of Greek antiquity, as preparing the way for the Christian usage (1 Tim 3}°, 1 Pet 417): see e.g. Magn 945 (ii/B.c.), where a certain Εὔφημος ἸΤαυσανίου νεωκόρος is praised for his liberality— eis T]O[v olk]Jov τὸν ἱερόν, 2. 1177 (Ist half ii/A.p.) τῷ ἱερῷ οἴκῳ τῶν ἐν Κλίδωνι, and Sy// 571 (-- 8 987)% (iv/B.c.), where mention is made of an οἶκος τεμένιος ἱερός in Chios. In Herodas i. 26 οἶκος τῆς θεοῦ refers to Aphrodite. From the fact that a tomb was often dedicated to a local deity, and hence became his ‘‘temple” or ‘‘home,” it is natural that οἶκος should be used in inscrr. in the sense of ““tomb,”’ as at Cibyra BCH ii. (1878), p. 610 f., and Magnesia Ζό. xviii. (1894) p.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οἶκος (oikos) — house: home.

οἶκος, ὁ,

house, not only of built houses, but of any dwelling-place, as that of Achilles at Troy (see. κλισία), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the Cyclops' cave, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a tent, [LXX]; οἶκον ἱκάνεται is coming home, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς or ἐς οἶκον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ κατ᾽ οἶκον[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀποχωρῆσαι go home wards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ οἴκου from home, [Refs]; compare οἰκία.

__b frequently omitted after εἰς or ἐν, see at {εἰς} [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. room, chamber, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dining-hall, ἑπτάκλινος οἶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; room in a temple, [Refs] frequently, = a single house, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κλαυθμῶν τῶν ἐξ οἴκων domestic griefs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς or πρὸς οἴκους, [Refs]; κατ᾽ οἴκους at home, within, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οἶκος

oikos

of uncertain affinity; a dwelling (more or less extensive, literal or

figurative); by implication, a family (more or less related, literally

or figuratively):--home, house(-hold), temple.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οἶκος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a house, household

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οἶκος oikos 114x

a house, dwelling, Mt. 9:6, 7; Mk. 2:1, 11; 3:20; place of abode, seat, site, Mt. 23:38; Lk. 13:35; met. a spiritual house or structure, 1 Pet. 2:5; meton. a household, family, Lk. 10:5; 11:17; a spiritual household, 1 Tim. 3:15; Heb. 3:6; family, lineage, Lk. 1:27, 69; 2:4; from the Hebrew, a people, nation, Mt. 10:6; 15:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

οἶκος οἶκος, ὁ, a house, abode, dwelling, Hom., Hes., etc.:— acc. οἶκον, ῀ οἶκόνδε, οἴκαδε, homeward, home, Od.; κατ᾽ οἴκους at home, within, Hdt.; κατ᾽ οἶκον Soph., etc: —ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀποχωρεῖν to go home wards, Thuc., etc.: ἀπ᾽ οἴκου from home, id. Thuc.

part of a house, a room, chamber, Od.: pl. οἶκοι for a single house, Lat. aedes, tecta, id. Od., attic

the house of a god, a temple, Hdt., Eur.

one's house, household goods, substance, Hom., etc.

a house, household, family, Od., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hous (bayith; oikos, in classical Greek generally "an estate," oikia, oikema (literally, "habitation"), in Ac 12:1, "prison"):

I. CAVE DWELLINGS

II. STONE-BUILT AND MUD/BRICK-BUILT HOUSES

1. Details of Plan and Construction

(1) Corner-Stone

(2) Floor

(3) Gutter

(4) Door

(5) Hinge

(6) Lock and Key

(7) Threshold

(8) Hearth

(9) Window

(10) Roof

2. Houses of More than One Story

(1) Upper Chambers and Stairs

(2) Palaces and Castles

3. Internal Appearance

III. OTHER MEANINGS

LITERATURE

I. Cave Dwellings.

The earliest permanent habitations of the prehistoric inhabitants of Palestine were the natural caves which abound throughout the country. As the people increased and grouped themselves into communities, these abodes were supplemented by systems of artificial caves which, in some cases, developed into extensive burrowings of many adjoining compartments, having…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

House

Till their sojourn in Egypt the Hebrews dwelt in tents. They then for the first time inhabited cities (Gen. 47:3; Ex. 12:7; Heb. 11:9). From the earliest times the Assyrians and the Canaanites were builders of cities. The Hebrews after the Conquest took possession of the captured cities, and seem to have followed the methods of building that had been pursued by the Canaanites. Reference is made to the stone (1 Kings 7:9; Isa. 9:10) and marble (1 Chr. 29:2) used in building, and to the internal wood-work of the houses (

The houses of the rural poor in Egypt, as well as in most parts of Syria, Arabia and Persia, are generally mere huts of mud or sunburnt bricks. In some parts of Palestine and Arabia stone is used, and in certain districts caves in the rocks are used as dwellings. (Amos 5:11) The houses are usually of one story only, viz., the ground floor, and often contain only one apartment. Sometimes a small court for the cattle is attached; and in some cases the cattle are housed in the same building, or the live in a raised platform, and, the cattle round them on the ground. (1 Samuel 28:24) The windows are small apertures high up in the walls, sometimes grated with wood. The roofs are commonly but not always flat, and are usually formed of plaster of mud and straw laid upon boughs or…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Is often put for dwelling, residence; and hence the temple, and even the tabernacle, are called the house of God.

The universal mode of building houses in the East, is in the form of a hollow square, with an open court or yard in the center; which is thus entirely shut in by the walls of the house around it. Into this court all the windows open, there being usually no windows towards the street. Some houses of large size require several courts, and these usually communicate with each other. These courts are commonly paved; and in many large houses parts of them are planted with shrubs and trees, Ps 84:3 128:3; they have also, when possible, a fountain in them, often with a jet d’ eau, 2Sa 17:18. It is customary in many houses to extend an awning over the whole court in hot…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%house
house74% · 84×household9% · 10×home9% · 10×other renderings3% · 3×other renderings5% · 6×

113 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial61%subject13%object12%predicate7%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 114 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνἐπί
κατά
Article theκαίand, even, also,τέDisj
εἰς
αὐτόςἔρχομαιI come, goεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
ἐν
ὅτιthat, since, becἐγώπεινάωI am hungry, nee
ἐγώ
οἶκοςa house, househoπατήρfather, Father,
οἶκοςhouse114×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἐκκλησίαan assembly, conκαίand, even, also,εὑρίσκωI find
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, βασιλεύςa king, ruler, e
σύ
πρόςκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak
ἐγώ
οἶκοςa house, househoἐπιστρέφωI turn back toὅθενwhence, wherefor
ἸσραήλProp
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,μετά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοἶκος · 114× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Mark Hebrews Matthew 1 Timothy John 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 2 Timothy Colossians Philemon

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 890 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 27c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ εὔλογον τῷ ὄντι πρῶτον αὐτὸν εἰς γένεσιν ἐλθεῖν, ἄριστόν τε ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κἀκ τοῦ καθαρωτάτου τῆς οὐσίας παγέντα, διότι θεῶν ἐμφανῶν τε καὶ αἰσθητῶν ἔμελλεν οἶκος ἔσεσθαι ἱερώτατος.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.61c. AD 75–95

αὔξων δὲ τὸν οἶκον πλήθει χρημάτων ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς καὶ βίας πρὸς ἡδονὴν καὶ λῃστείαν τοὺς ἐντυγχάνοντας παρακαλῶν διδάσκαλος αὐτοῖς ὑπῆρχε πονηρῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων, καὶ τὴν ἀπραγμοσύνην, ᾗ πρότερον συνέζων οἱ ἄνθρωποι, μέτρων ἐπινοίᾳ καὶ σταθμῶν μετεστήσατο…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.3c. AD 100

διάθρυπτε πεινῶσιν τὸν ἄρτον σου, καὶ γυμνὸν ἐὰν ἴδῃς περίβαλε: ἀστέγους εἴσαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκον σου, καὶ ἐὰν ἴδῃς ταπεινόν, οὐχ ὑπερόψῃ αὐτόν, οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκείων τοῦ σπέρματός σου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD

ἀποκαταστησάτωσαν εἰς οἶκον τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶσι καθότι πρόκειται ἀποτεισάτωσαν ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

καὶ παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

δεδανεισμένος Ὥρωι ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους καθαρὸν ἀπὸ παντὸς καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασι μέτρῳ ᾧ καὶ παρείληφεν· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
αὐτοῦ,autos of Him, G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof Him,5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
οὗhos, hē whose G3739 Relative pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-GSM — Relative pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-GSM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwhose1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
οἶκόςoikos house G3624 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
114× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A house refers to a physical dwelling, like a home, as mentioned in Acts 2:2 and Matthew 9:6. It can also represent a family or a community, whether related by blood or not. The term is used to describe the temple in Matthew 21:13.
Amplified meaning
a family or household of faith
Tyndale gloss
house: home
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

οἶκος (oikos) primarily means a house or dwelling, but it also extends to refer to a household or family. In the New Testament, it is used in various contexts, including literal homes (Acts 2:2) and metaphorical uses such as the Church (1 Peter 2:5). The word can denote a sanctuary or temple, reflecting its broader significance in both Greek and Hebrew traditions.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οἶκος, -οῦ, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for בַּיִת, also for הֵיכָל, אֹהֶל, etc.;]

prop., a house, dwelling: Ac 2:2 19:16; c. gen. poss., Mt 9:6, 7, Mk 2:11, Lk 1:23, al.; c. gen. attrib., ἐμπορίου, Jo 2:16; προσευχῆς, Mt 21:13, al.; of a sanctuary (Hdt., Eur.): οἶ. τ. θεοῦ, of the tabernacle, Mt 12:4, al.; the temple, Mt 21:13, al.; metaph. of a city: Mt 23:38, Lk 13:35; of the body, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οἶκος, -ου, ὁ, [ef. Lat. views, Eng. ending -wich; Curtius § 95], fr. Hom. down; Sept. in numberless places for 13, also for ‘on a palace, mk a tent, ete.; 1. a house; a. strictly, an inhabited house [differing thus fr. δόμος the building]: Acts ii. 2; xix. 16; τινός, Mt. ix. 6 sq.; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38; Lk. i. 23, 40, 56; viii. 39, 41, εἴς. ; ἔρχεσθαι eis οἶκον, to come into a house (domum venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19); εἰς τὸν οἶκον, into the (i. 6. his or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, in the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20; ἐν οἴκῳ, at home, 1 Co. xi. 34; xiv. 35; of εἰς τὸν οἶκον (see eis, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61; κατ᾽ οἶκον, opp. to ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, in a household assembly, in private, [R. V. at home; see κατά, II. 1 d.], Acts ii. 46; ν. 42; κατ᾽ οἴκους, opp. to δημοσίᾳ, in private houses, [A. V. from house to house; see κατά, II. 3 a.], Acts xx. 20; κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οἶκος. As illustrating the NT conception of the otkos πνευματukds and the οἶκος τοῦ θεοῦ Thieme (p. 31) refers not only to the place which ‘‘the house of God” had in Jewish religion, but also to the ‘‘holy houses” of Greek antiquity, as preparing the way for the Christian usage (1 Tim 3}°, 1 Pet 417): see e.g. Magn 945 (ii/B.c.), where a certain Εὔφημος ἸΤαυσανίου νεωκόρος is praised for his liberality— eis T]O[v olk]Jov τὸν ἱερόν, 2. 1177 (Ist half ii/A.p.) τῷ ἱερῷ οἴκῳ τῶν ἐν Κλίδωνι, and Sy// 571 (-- 8 987)% (iv/B.c.), where mention is made of an οἶκος τεμένιος ἱερός in Chios. In Herodas i. 26 οἶκος τῆς θεοῦ refers to Aphrodite. From the fact that a tomb was often dedicated to a local deity, and hence became his ‘‘temple” or ‘‘home,” it is natural that οἶκος should be used in inscrr. in the sense of ““tomb,”’ as at Cibyra BCH ii. (1878), p. 610 f., and Magnesia Ζό. xviii. (1894) p.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οἶκος (oikos) — house: home.

οἶκος, ὁ,

house, not only of built houses, but of any dwelling-place, as that of Achilles at Troy (see. κλισία), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the Cyclops' cave, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a tent, [LXX]; οἶκον ἱκάνεται is coming home, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς or ἐς οἶκον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ κατ᾽ οἶκον[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀποχωρῆσαι go home wards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ οἴκου from home, [Refs]; compare οἰκία.

__b frequently omitted after εἰς or ἐν, see at {εἰς} [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. room, chamber, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dining-hall, ἑπτάκλινος οἶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; room in a temple, [Refs] frequently, = a single house, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κλαυθμῶν τῶν ἐξ οἴκων domestic griefs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς or πρὸς οἴκους, [Refs]; κατ᾽ οἴκους at home, within, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οἶκος

oikos

of uncertain affinity; a dwelling (more or less extensive, literal or

figurative); by implication, a family (more or less related, literally

or figuratively):--home, house(-hold), temple.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οἶκος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a house, household

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οἶκος oikos 114x

a house, dwelling, Mt. 9:6, 7; Mk. 2:1, 11; 3:20; place of abode, seat, site, Mt. 23:38; Lk. 13:35; met. a spiritual house or structure, 1 Pet. 2:5; meton. a household, family, Lk. 10:5; 11:17; a spiritual household, 1 Tim. 3:15; Heb. 3:6; family, lineage, Lk. 1:27, 69; 2:4; from the Hebrew, a people, nation, Mt. 10:6; 15:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

οἶκος οἶκος, ὁ, a house, abode, dwelling, Hom., Hes., etc.:— acc. οἶκον, ῀ οἶκόνδε, οἴκαδε, homeward, home, Od.; κατ᾽ οἴκους at home, within, Hdt.; κατ᾽ οἶκον Soph., etc: —ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀποχωρεῖν to go home wards, Thuc., etc.: ἀπ᾽ οἴκου from home, id. Thuc.

part of a house, a room, chamber, Od.: pl. οἶκοι for a single house, Lat. aedes, tecta, id. Od., attic

the house of a god, a temple, Hdt., Eur.

one's house, household goods, substance, Hom., etc.

a house, household, family, Od., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hous (bayith; oikos, in classical Greek generally "an estate," oikia, oikema (literally, "habitation"), in Ac 12:1, "prison"):

I. CAVE DWELLINGS

II. STONE-BUILT AND MUD/BRICK-BUILT HOUSES

1. Details of Plan and Construction

(1) Corner-Stone

(2) Floor

(3) Gutter

(4) Door

(5) Hinge

(6) Lock and Key

(7) Threshold

(8) Hearth

(9) Window

(10) Roof

2. Houses of More than One Story

(1) Upper Chambers and Stairs

(2) Palaces and Castles

3. Internal Appearance

III. OTHER MEANINGS

LITERATURE

I. Cave Dwellings.

The earliest permanent habitations of the prehistoric inhabitants of Palestine were the natural caves which abound throughout the country. As the people increased and grouped themselves into communities, these abodes were supplemented by systems of artificial caves which, in some cases, developed into extensive burrowings of many adjoining compartments, having…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

House

Till their sojourn in Egypt the Hebrews dwelt in tents. They then for the first time inhabited cities (Gen. 47:3; Ex. 12:7; Heb. 11:9). From the earliest times the Assyrians and the Canaanites were builders of cities. The Hebrews after the Conquest took possession of the captured cities, and seem to have followed the methods of building that had been pursued by the Canaanites. Reference is made to the stone (1 Kings 7:9; Isa. 9:10) and marble (1 Chr. 29:2) used in building, and to the internal wood-work of the houses (

The houses of the rural poor in Egypt, as well as in most parts of Syria, Arabia and Persia, are generally mere huts of mud or sunburnt bricks. In some parts of Palestine and Arabia stone is used, and in certain districts caves in the rocks are used as dwellings. (Amos 5:11) The houses are usually of one story only, viz., the ground floor, and often contain only one apartment. Sometimes a small court for the cattle is attached; and in some cases the cattle are housed in the same building, or the live in a raised platform, and, the cattle round them on the ground. (1 Samuel 28:24) The windows are small apertures high up in the walls, sometimes grated with wood. The roofs are commonly but not always flat, and are usually formed of plaster of mud and straw laid upon boughs or…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Is often put for dwelling, residence; and hence the temple, and even the tabernacle, are called the house of God.

The universal mode of building houses in the East, is in the form of a hollow square, with an open court or yard in the center; which is thus entirely shut in by the walls of the house around it. Into this court all the windows open, there being usually no windows towards the street. Some houses of large size require several courts, and these usually communicate with each other. These courts are commonly paved; and in many large houses parts of them are planted with shrubs and trees, Ps 84:3 128:3; they have also, when possible, a fountain in them, often with a jet d’ eau, 2Sa 17:18. It is customary in many houses to extend an awning over the whole court in hot…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%house
house74% · 84×household9% · 10×home9% · 10×other renderings3% · 3×other renderings5% · 6×

113 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial61%subject13%object12%predicate7%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 114 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνἐπί
κατά
Article theκαίand, even, also,τέDisj
εἰς
αὐτόςἔρχομαιI come, goεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
ἐν
ὅτιthat, since, becἐγώπεινάωI am hungry, nee
ἐγώ
οἶκοςa house, househoπατήρfather, Father,
οἶκοςhouse114×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἐκκλησίαan assembly, conκαίand, even, also,εὑρίσκωI find
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, βασιλεύςa king, ruler, e
σύ
πρόςκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak
ἐγώ
οἶκοςa house, househoἐπιστρέφωI turn back toὅθενwhence, wherefor
ἸσραήλProp
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,μετά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοἶκος · 114× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Mark Hebrews Matthew 1 Timothy John 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 2 Timothy Colossians Philemon

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 890 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 27c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ εὔλογον τῷ ὄντι πρῶτον αὐτὸν εἰς γένεσιν ἐλθεῖν, ἄριστόν τε ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κἀκ τοῦ καθαρωτάτου τῆς οὐσίας παγέντα, διότι θεῶν ἐμφανῶν τε καὶ αἰσθητῶν ἔμελλεν οἶκος ἔσεσθαι ἱερώτατος.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.61c. AD 75–95

αὔξων δὲ τὸν οἶκον πλήθει χρημάτων ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς καὶ βίας πρὸς ἡδονὴν καὶ λῃστείαν τοὺς ἐντυγχάνοντας παρακαλῶν διδάσκαλος αὐτοῖς ὑπῆρχε πονηρῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων, καὶ τὴν ἀπραγμοσύνην, ᾗ πρότερον συνέζων οἱ ἄνθρωποι, μέτρων ἐπινοίᾳ καὶ σταθμῶν μετεστήσατο…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.3c. AD 100

διάθρυπτε πεινῶσιν τὸν ἄρτον σου, καὶ γυμνὸν ἐὰν ἴδῃς περίβαλε: ἀστέγους εἴσαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκον σου, καὶ ἐὰν ἴδῃς ταπεινόν, οὐχ ὑπερόψῃ αὐτόν, οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκείων τοῦ σπέρματός σου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD

ἀποκαταστησάτωσαν εἰς οἶκον τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶσι καθότι πρόκειται ἀποτεισάτωσαν ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

καὶ παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

δεδανεισμένος Ὥρωι ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους καθαρὸν ἀπὸ παντὸς καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασι μέτρῳ ᾧ καὶ παρείληφεν· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
ἐσμενeimi are G1510 Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · plural
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-1P — Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · plural
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-1P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίare2457×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
Article theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
ἡμεῖςegō we ourselves G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · nominative · plural
1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-1NP — Personal pronoun · first person · nominative · plural
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1NP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Nominative Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%us
us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
ἐάνπερean if indeed G1437 Conditional particle
339× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'if' and is used to show uncertainty or possibility, as in Matthew 6:22 and Romans 2:25, to express conditions or circumstances.
Tyndale gloss
if
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἐάν is a conditional particle formed from εἰ (if) and ἄν. It indicates uncertainty or a hypothetical situation, often followed by the subjunctive mood. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as in Matthew 6:22 and Romans 2:25. It can also appear with other particles, enhancing its conditional meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν,

conditional particle,

representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ c. ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jo 13:17, I Co 7:36), if haply, if;

c. subjc. (cl.);

pres.: Mt 6:22, Lk 10:6, Jo 7:17, Ro 2:25, 26 al.;

aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mt 4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Lk 9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mk 3:24, Lk 14:34, Jo 5:43,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐάν ; I. aconditional particle (derived fr. εἰ ἄν), which makes reference to time and to experience, introducing something future, but not determining, before the event, whether it is certainly to take place; if, in case, (Lat. si; Germ. wenn; im Fall, dass; falls; wofern); οἴ.» among others, Hermann ad Viger. p.832; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p- 450 sqq.; W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the subjunc. Present: Mt. vi. 22 (ἐὰν οὖν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ἁπλοῦς 7, if it be the case, as to which I do not know, that thine eye etc.); ibid. 23; xvii. 20; Lk. x. 6; Jn. vii. 17; viii. 54 [RGL mrg.]; ix. 31; xi. 9,10; Acts v. 38; xiii. 41; Ro. ii. 25 sq.; 1 Co.ix.16; Gal. v. 2; 1 Tim. i. 8 [not Lehm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 ete. Ὁ. with the subjunc. Aorist, corresponding to the Lat.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐάν (ean) — if.

ἐάν

(so early Attic Inscrr., as [Refs 4th c.BC+], also contraction ἤν and ἄν, see at {ἤν},{ἄν} (B) [ᾱ], which by crasis with καί become κἄν:—if haply, if, regularly followed by subjunctive: for its use and for examples, see at {εἰ} [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. in Hellenistic and late Greek, ={ἄν} after relative Pronouns and Conjunctions, as ὃς ἐάν whosoever, [LXX+5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐάν ἐάνπερ

ean

from 1487 and 302; a conditional particle; in case that, provided,

etc.; often used in connection with other particles to denote

indefiniteness or uncertainty:--before, but, except, (and) if, (if)

so, (what-, whither-)soever, though, when (-soever), whether (or), to

whom, (who-)so(-ever). See 3361.

see GREEK for 1487

see GREEK for 302

see GREEK for 3361

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐάν

Cond.

if

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐάν ean 350x

if, ἐὰν μή, except, unless; also equivalent to ἀλλά, Gal. 2:16. Ἐάν, in NT as in the later Greek, is substituted for ἄν after relative words, Mt. 5:19. Tends to be an indicator for the subjunctive mood.

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐάν compounded of εἰ ἄν ἐα?ν contracts into ἤν and ἄν if haply, if, followed by subj. (whereas εἰ is foll. by ind. or opt.), epic εἴ κε, αἴ κε.

in NTest. ἐάν is used just like the adverb ἄν after relative Pronouns and Conjunctions, as ὃς ἐάν whosoever, ὅσος ἐάν, ὅστις ἐάν, ὅπου ἐάν, etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
COND — Conditional particle
conditional particle — it marks the clause as a condition.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

COND CONDitional particle or conjunction

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%if
if74% · 255×only14% · 49×maybe8% · 26×other renderings4% · 15×

345 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial11%subject8%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 339 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existδῶρονa gift, present
καίand, even, also, nam
ἁμαρτάνωI sinεἷςoneαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύαὐτόςγάρfor
σύ
λέγωI say, speakπρόςποιέωI do, make
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐπίδέbut, on the othe
ἐάνif indeed339×
what comes after →
μήNeg
μετανοέωI repent, changeτὶςεἰμίI am, exist
τὶς
σύἀδελφόςa brotherArticle the
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,Article theμήNeg
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastφωνήa sound, noise, ἐντολήan ordinance, in
θέλωI will, wish, desire
δύναμαιI am powerful, aArticle theἵναin order that, s

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐάν · 339× in the New Testament
Matthew John 1 Corinthians Mark Luke 1 John Romans Acts Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 746 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 79c. AD 40

τουτὶ δὲ συμβήσεται, ἐὰν μήτε αἱ ἄλογοι ἡδοναὶ ψυχῆς δυναστεύσωσι γαστριμαργίαν καὶ λαγνείαν ἐπιτειχίσασαι μήτε αἱ δόξης ἢ χρημάτων ἢ ἀρχῆς ἐπιθυμίαι τὸ τοῦ βίου κράτος ἀνάψωνται μήτε στείλωσι καὶ κάμψωσι διάνοιαν αἱ λῦπαι μήθ’ ὁ κακὸς σύμβουλος…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.252c. AD 75–95

ἐὰν δέ που μόνῃ περιπεσὼν βιάσηται μηδενὸς βοηθοῦ παρόντος, μόνος ἀποθνησκέτω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Adl. 10Pathyris102 BC

δεδανεισμένος Πανᾶς Ἀγαθίνωι καὶ Πατῆτι τοῖς δανείζουσιν ἐν μηνὶ Ἐπεὶφ εἰκάδος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἀποτεισάτω καθὰ γέγραπται παραχρῆμα ἐπάναγκον· ἡ δὲ

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ποιησάτω ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ιε ἔτους, καὶ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστης ἀρτάβης πυροῦ ἧς ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶι χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας τετρακοσίας , κριθῆς χιλίας τετρακοσίας , καὶ ἑβδόμην μερίδα

P.Adl. 19Pathyris99 BC

τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ δεδανεισμένος τῶι δανείζοντι ἐν μηνὶ Μεσορὴ λ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ιϛ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιήσηι καθὰ γέγραπται ἀποτεισάτω ἐν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
τὴνho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
παρρησίανparrēsia [our] confidence G3954 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means boldness or freedom in speaking, like the apostles in Acts 4:13 and 2 Corinthians 3:12, who spoke openly about Jesus.
Amplified meaning
boldness or freedom in speaking
Tyndale gloss
boldness
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παρρησία is built from πᾶς (all) and ῥῆσις (speech), covering meanings like freedom of speech, boldness, and confidence. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as Acts 4:13 and John 7:13. The lexicons note its use in both positive and negative senses, with some indicating a shift from boldness in speech to general confidence.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρρησία, -ας, ἡ

(< πᾶς + ῥῆσις, speech),

[in LXX: Le 26:13 (μετὰ π., קוֹמְמִיּוּת), Pr 1:20 10:10, Wi 5:1, al.;]

freedom of speech, plainness, openness, freedom in speaking (Eur., Plat., al.): Ac 4:13, II Co 3:12; παρρησίᾳ, adverbially, freely, openly, plainly, Mk 8:32, Jo 7:13, 26 10:24 11:14 16:29 18:20; opp. to ἐν παροιμίαις, Jo 16:25; ἐν π., Eph 6:19; μετὰ π., Ac 2:29 4:29, 31 28:31.

In LXX (I Mac 4:18, Wi 5:1, al.), FlJ, and NT, also (from the absence of fear which accompanies freedom of speech), confidence, boldness:

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρρησία, -as, 7, (πᾶν and pros; cf. ἀρρησία silence, κατάρρησις accusation, πρόρρησις prediction) ; 1. freedom in speaking, unreservedness in speech, (Kur., Plat., Dem., al.): ἡ π. τινός, Acts iv. 13; χρῆσθαι παρρησίᾳ, 2 Co. iii. 12; παρρησίᾳ adverbially,— freely: λαλεῖν, Jn. vii. 13, 26; xviii. 20 ;— openly, frankly, i. e. without concealment: Mk. viii. 32; Jn. xi. 14; — without ambiguity or cireumlocution: εἰπὲ ἡμῖν παρρησίᾳ (Philem. ed. Meineke p. 405), Jn. x. 24;— without the use of figures and comparisons, opp. to ἐν παροιμίαις : Jn. xvi. 25, and RG in 29 (where L TTr WH ἐν παρρησίᾳ); ἐν παρρησίᾳ, Sreely, Eph. vi. 19; pera παρρησίας, Acts xxviil. 31 ; εἰπεῖν, Acts ii. 29; λαλεῖν, Acts iv. 29, 31. 2. free and fearless confidence, cheerful courage, boldness, assurance, (1.Mace. iv. 18; Sap. ν. 1 ; Joseph. antt. 9, 10,4; 15, 2, 7; [οἷν W. 23]): Phil. i. 20 (opp. to αἰσχύνεσθαι, cf.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παρρησία. ‘In accordance with its etymology παρρησία is used especially of ‘‘freedom,’’ ‘‘ boldness” zz speech, but it readily passes into the more general meaning ‘‘ confidence,’’ as in Heb 38, 1 Jn 228, Job 2719, Zest. xzt. patr. Reub iv. 2. This may be illustrated from P Par 63%%! 7 (B.c. 165) καλῶς ἔχειν ὑπέλαβον ταύτην ἔτι τὴν παρησίαν (for spelling, cf. Winer-Schmiedel Gy. p. 56) ἀγαγεῖν πρός σε. P Oxy VIII. 1100!° (A.D. 206) με]τὰ παρρησίας (cf. Ac 2831), unfortunately in a broken context, and Kazse/ 1096 παρησίαν ὁμοίαν οὐκ ἔχων βροτοῖς. Cf. also Aristeas 125 συμβουλευόντων παρρησίᾳ πρὸς τὸ συμφέρον τῶν φίλων, ‘since friends unreservedly offer advice for one’s best interests ” (Thackeray). In OG/S 3231° (B C. 159-8) εὐδοκι[μη]κὼς ἐν ταῖς χρείαις ἁπάσαις κιεκ]όσμηκε τὸν αὑτοῦ [β]ίον τῆι καλλίστηι παρρησίαι. the word seems to be equivalent to ““ liberality,” and in Vett. Val. p.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παρρησία (parrēsia) — boldness.

παρρησί-α, ἡ,

(πᾶς, ῥῆσις) outspokenness, frankness, freedom of speech, claimed by the Athenians as their privilege, ἐλεύθεροι παρρησίᾳ θάλλοντες οἰκοῖεν πόλιν κλεινῶν Ἀθηνῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔχειν π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δημοκρατίας οὔσης οὐκ ἔστι π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ παρρησίας, title of work by Philodemus.

2. in bad sense, licence of tongue, ἡ εἰς τοὺς θεοὺς π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. freedom of action, [Refs 5th c.AD+]; π. ζωῆς καὶ θανάτου power of life and death, [Refs]; licence, permission, [Refs 6th c.AD+]; παρρησίᾳ ἐκτέμνεται τὸ δέρμα without fear, [Refs 6th c.AD+]; ἤγαγον ὑμᾶς μετὰ παρρησίας openly, [LXX]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παρρησία

parrhesia

from 3956 and a derivative of 4483; all out-spokenness, i.e.

frankness, bluntness, publicity; by implication, assurance:--bold (X

-ly, -ness, -ness of speech), confidence,

X freely, X openly, X plainly(-ness).

see GREEK for 3956

see GREEK for 4483

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παρρησία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

freedom, confidence

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παρρησία parrēsia 31x

freedom in speaking, boldness of speech, Acts 4:13; παρρησίᾳ, as an adv., freely, boldly, Jn. 7:13, 26; so μετὰ παρρησίας, Acts 2:29; 4:29, 31; license, authority, Phlm. 8; confidence, assurance, 2 Cor. 7:4; Eph. 3:12; Heb. 3:6; 10:19; openness, frankness, 2 Cor. 3:12; παρρησίᾳ, and ἐν παρρησίᾳ, adverbially, openly, plainly, perspicuously, unambiguously, Mk. 8:32; Jn. 10:24

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kon'-fi-dens (baTach, and forms, kecel; parrhesia; peitho, pepoithesis, hupostasis): The chief Hebrew word translated "confidence" (baTach, and its forms) means, perhaps, radically, "to be open," showing thus what originated the idea of "confidence"; where there was nothing hidden a person felt safe; it is very frequently rendered "trust." In Ps 118:8,9 we have "It is better to take refuge in Yahweh than to put confidence in princes," and in 65:5, "O God of our salvation, thou that art the confidence (mibhTach) of all the ends of the earth." MibhTach is translated "confidence" in Job 18:14; 31:24; Pr 21:22, etc.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ BETRAYED

INSTANCES OF

Joshua, by the Gibeonites Jos 9:3-15

Eglon, by Ehud Jud 3:15-23

Ahimelech, by David 1Sa 21:1-9

Abner, by Joab 2Sa 3:27

Amasa, by Joab 2Sa 20:9,10

The worshipers of Baal, by Jehu 2Ki 10:18-28

See BETRAYAL

→ FALSE De 29:18,19; 1Ki 20:11; 2Ki 18:21; Isa 36:6; Job 11:20; 15:31; 29:18;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
42%boldness
boldness42% · 13×confidence19% · 6×publicly10% · 3×plainly10% · 3×public6% · 2×openly6% · 2×freedom3% · 1×openness3% · 1×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial58%object32%subject7%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
αὐτόςνῦνnow, already, atἐγώ
μετά
λέγωI say, speakσύθεόςGod, a god
Article the
ἔχωI have, hold, poἐάνCondοὖνtherefore, then
ἐγώ
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusπολύςmuch, many, ofte
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
μετάἐν
παρρησία[our] confidence31×
what comes after →
λαλέωI speak, say
καίand, even, also,περίArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἸωάννηςJohnπροσαγωγήapproach, accessArticle the
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ἐπιτάσσωI give order, coπρόςἐν
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, θρόνοςa throne, seat
πρός
σύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαρρησία · 31× in the New Testament
John Acts 1 John Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Timothy Colossians Mark Philemon Philippians
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 12c. AD 40

καὶ ὅταν γε μόνος ἰδίᾳ τῷ θεῷ προσέρχηται, μετὰ παρρησίας φησὶ μὴ εἶναι εὔλογος — ἴσον τῷ μὴ τῶν εὐλόγων καὶ πιθανῶν ἐφίεσθαι —, πεπονθέναι δὲ τοῦτο πρὸ τῆς ἐχθὲς καὶ τρίτης, ἀφ’ οὗ τὸν θεὸν ἄρξασθαι διαλέγεσθαι ὡς θεράποντι αὐτῷ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.52c. AD 75–95

τῆς δὲ πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρα κοινωνίας ἀπόλαυσιν ἐχούσης ἀκίνδυνον καὶ προσέτι πολλὴν τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ συνειδότος καὶ πρὸς τὸν θεὸν παρρησίαν καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 34.1c. AD 96

Ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἐργάτης μετὰ παρρησίας λαμβάνει τὸν ἄρτον τοῦ ἔργου αὐτοῦ, ὁ νωθρὸς καὶ παρειμένος οὐκ ἀντοφθαλμεῖ τῷ ἐργοπαρέκτῃ αὐτοῦ,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Mich. 8 502KoptosAD 101–AD 200

τοῦτο μόνον. παρακληθείς, ἄδελφε, διαλλάγηθί μοι ὅπως χρήσωμαι καὶ ἐν τῇ στρατείᾳ τῇ σῇ παρρησίᾳ. τὸ δὴ λοιπὸν μὴ εἶχές με μηδʼ ἑξῆς ἀδελφῷ ἐξ οὗ ἐπεξενώθην; ἀλλʼ ἔχω

P.Oxy. 8 1100OxyrhynchosAD 206

των τ … … ν διασειόντων τῶν εἰς ταῦτα ὑπηρη … … μετὰ παρρησίας, καὶ ἂν ἐλεγχθῶσι, τῆς προσηκούσης τεύξονται τιμωρίας. εἰ δὲ … … … ροιντο τοῖς

ἀναστάντος καὶ διὰ τῶν θεωμένων ἐλθόντος κατὰ μέσον τοῦ θεάτρου, ἐφώνησαν· Ἰσίδωρε ἡ βία παρρησία· τίς ὁ φθόνος τῆς εἰρήνης; τὸν ἀναστάσεως … … … ωνι ἔχεις αὐτόν· στρατηγέ,

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
καύχημαkauchēma boast G2745 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A boast or something to be proud of, as in 2 Corinthians 5:12 and Romans 4:2. It can be a good or bad thing, like a reason to glory or a source of pride. The KJV translates it as boasting or glorying.
Amplified meaning
a pride or glory, firmly established, stable
Tyndale gloss
pride
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καύχημα is a neuter noun derived from καυχάομαι, meaning a boast or subject of boasting. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as Romans 4:2 and 1 Corinthians 5:6, where it refers to matters of glorying or pride. The lexicons note some debate on its usage compared to related terms like καύχησις, particularly in the context of glorying.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καύχημα, -τος, τό

(< καυχάομαι),

[in LXX chiefly for תְּהִלָּה, תִּפְאֶרֶה;]

a boast (Pind.): II Co 5:12 9:3 (Thayer, s.v.; e. contra, 2, Ellic., Lft., on Ga 6:4; Lft., Notes, 204, 277).

ground or matter of glorying: Ro 4:2, I Co 5:6 9:15, 16, II Co 1:14, Ga 6:4, Phl 1:26 2:16, He 3:6 (cf. καύχησις).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καύχημα, -Tos, τό, (καυχάομαι), very rare in prof. auth.; Sept. for mbmN praise, and ΠΝ ΘΓ ornament, beanies several times in Sir. 1. that of which one Bree or can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. ix. 15 sq.; 2 Co. i. 14; Phil. ii. 16; τὸ καύχημα ἔχειν εἰς his glorying confined to himself [R. V. in regard of himself alone], Gal. vi. 4; τὸ x. τῆς ἐλπίδος, the matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. the hope, of which we glory, Heb. iii. 6. 2. As γέννημα, δίωγμα, θέλημα, ἴαμα, κήρυγμα (2 Tim. iv. 17), κλαῦμα, πλήρωμα, φρόνημα, ete., are used for γέννησις, δίωξις, θέλησις, κτλ. [ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 6], so also (which H. A. W. Meyer persists in denying [as respects the New Testament (see his note on Ro. iv. 2); so Ellicott and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. vi. 4; Liinem. on Heb. u. s.]) is καύχημα used for καύχησις (Pind. Isthm. 5, 65 [ef. Meyer on Phil. i. 26 note; on…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καύχημα (kauchēma) — pride.

καύχ-ημα,

Doric dialect καύχ-ᾱμα, ατος, τό, a boast, vaunt, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. subject of boasting, [NT+2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καύχημα

kauchema

from 2744; a boast (properly, the object; by implication, the act) in

a good or a bad sense:--boasting, (whereof) to glory (of), glorying,

rejoice(-ing).

see GREEK for 2744

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καύχημα, ατος, τό

n.n.

a boasting

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καύχημα kauchēma 11x

a glorying, boasting, 1 Cor. 5:6; a ground or matter of glorying or boasting, Rom. 4:2; joy, exultation, Phil. 1:26; complimentary testimony, 1 Cor. 9:15, 16; 2 Cor. 9:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καύχημα καύχημα, ατος, τό, καυχάομαι a boast, vaunt, Pind.

a subject of boasting, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

bost (halal, "to praise"; kauchaomai, "to vaunt oneself," used both in a good and a bad sense): To praise God: "In God have we made our boast all the day long" (Ps 44:8); to praise oneself, to vaunt (Ps 10:3). In the New Testament the Revised Version (British and American) frequently translates "glory," where the King James Version has "boast," in a good sense (2Co 7:14). In the sense of self-righteousness (Eph 2:9; Ro 2:17,23). Boaster (alazon, "a braggart") occurs in the King James Version (Ro 1:30; 2Ti 3:2); the…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%boasting
boasting64% · 7×ground of boasting18% · 2×boast18% · 2×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object46%subject36%predicate9%adverbial9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καλόςbeautiful, good,DisjμήNeg
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
δικαιόωI make righteous
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
ὅτιthat, since, because
μέροςa part, portion
σύ
δίδωμιI offer, give
καύχημαboast11×
what comes after →
σύ
οὐNegεἰμίI am, existπερισσεύωI exceed, am lef
ἐγώ
οὐδείςno one, none, noArticle theεἰς
ἀλλάbut, except
οὐNeg
ἀνάγκηnecessity, constrain
γάρfor
ὑπέρ
ἐγώ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαύχημα · 11× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Philippians Galatians Hebrews Romans
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 13 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Special Laws 4.164c. AD 40

οἱ μὲν οὖν ἄλλοι βασιλεῖς βακτηρίας ἔχοντες σκηπτροφοροῦσιν, ἐμοὶ δὲ τὸ σκῆπτρόν ἐστιν ἡ βίβλος τῆς Ἐπινομίδος, καύχημα καὶ κλέος ἀνανταγώνιστον, παράσημον ἡγεμονίας ἀνεπιλήπτου πρὸς ἀρχέτυπον τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ βασιλείαν ἀπεικονισθείσης.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 34.5c. AD 96

τὸ καύχημα ἡμῶν καὶ ἡ παρρησία ἔστω ἐν αὐτῷ: ὑποτασσώμεθα τῷ θελήματι αὐτοῦ: κατανοήσωμεν τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος τῶν ἀγγέλων αὐτοῦ, πῶς τῷ θελήματι αὐτοῦ λειτουργοῦσιν παρεστῶτες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
8th c. AD
AncSoc 22 (1991), p. 303-304Khirbet Mird (Palästina)AD 701–AD 800

ἐντεύξεων αἰσίως διεξάγεται. ἐρρωμένοι, κεχαρμένοι, μακροχρόνιοι διαρκοῖτε φρουρούσης ὑμᾶς τῆς θεοῦ προνοίας εἰς καύχημα τῆς ἡμῶν οὐθενότητος. ἐγράφη μηνὸς Ἰουλίου κϛ ἰνδικτίονος α. τὸν κύριον ἀββᾶ Σαμουήλ, τὸν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
τῆςho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
ἐλπίδοςelpis of [our] hope G1680 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
53× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Hope or expectation, as in 2 Corinthians 1:6 and Acts 16:19, where it refers to trusting in God's goodness.
Amplified meaning
expectation or trust
Tyndale gloss
hope
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐλπίς (lemma: elpis) means hope or expectation, primarily in a positive sense. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often referring to religious hope, such as the hope of salvation or the Messianic hope of Israel. Notably, it can denote both the object of hope and the source of hope, as seen in various verses like Romans 5:4 and Acts 24:15.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐλπίς

(ἑλ-, Ro 8:20, WH, v. Bl., § 4, 3; M, Pr., 44), -ίδος, ἡ

[in LXX for בָּטַח and its derivatives, תִּקְוָה (freq. in Jb), etc. ;]

expectation (in cl., rarely of evil, mostly of good, and so always in NT), hope;

of hope in general: II Co 1:6; c. gen. obj., Ac 16:19; art. inf., Ac 27:20, I Co 9:10; παρ’ ἐλπίδα, Ro 4:18; ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι, I Co 9:10.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐλπίς [sometimes written ἑλπίς ἢ so WH in Ro. viii. 20; Tdf.in Acts ii. 26; see (in 2 below, and) the reff. s. V. ἀφεῖδον], -ἰδος, ἡ, (ἔλπω to make to hope), Sept. for nua and m3, trust; TOM that in which one confides or to which he flees for refuge; MpA expectation, hope; in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of good or of ill; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation of evil, fear; as, τῶν κακῶν ἐλπίς. Leian. Tyrannic. ec. 3; τοῦ φόβου ἐλπίς, Thuc. 7, 61; κακὴ ἐλπίς. Plat. rep. 1 p. 330 e. [ef. legg. 1 p. 644 c. fin.]; πονηρὰ edz. Is. XXvili. 19 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classics, and always in the N. T., in a good sense: expectation of good, hope; and in the Christian sense, joyful and confident expectation of eternal salvation: Acts xxiii. 63 xxvi. 7; Ro. v. 4.Βη.; xii. 12; xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 185; 1 Pet. i. 3; iii. 15; ἀγαθὴ ἐλπίς (often in prof. auth., as Plat.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐλπίς “Ελληνιστί. P Giss I. 365 (B.c. 161) ἀ(ντίγραφον) [συγχωρήσεως Alyurr]([as με]θη[ρ]μην[εὐ]μένης “Ἑλληνιστὶ κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν, P Tor I. 1%4 (B.c. 117) ἀντίγραφα συγγραφῶν Αἰγυπτίων διηρμηνευμένων δ᾽ λληνιστί. For this form of the word see Mayser Gr. p. 457, and for the elliptical usage in Ac 2137 see Field Notes, p. 135 f. élhoyaw (—éw). To Lightfoot’s examples of this word from the inscriptions in his note on Philem?8 τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγα, may now be added several occurrences in the papyri in its general Hellenistic form ἐλλογέω. Thus the technical sense of ‘‘set to one’s account,”’ as in the Philemon passage, comes out well in P Ryl II. 243" (ii/a.b.) where two women write to their steward—8oa ποτὲ οὖν ἐὰν ἀναναλώσῃς (1. ἀναλώσῃΞς) ts τὴν τοῦ κλήρου κατεργασίαν, ἡμεῖν ἐνλόγησον ἐπὶ λόγου, “put down to our account everything you expend on the cultivation of the holding ” (Edd.), and in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐλπίς (elpis) — hope.

ἐλπ-ίς, ίδος, ἡ,

(see. ἔλπω) hope, expectation (δόξα μελλόντων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πολλῶν ῥαγεισῶν ἐλπίδων after the wreck of many hopes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; expectancy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —Constr., in _Attic dialect_, with _genitive_ both of subject and object, as (where both are conjoined) Πελοποννησίων τὴν ἐλπίδα τοῦ ναυτικοῦ the hope of the P.in their navy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑμέτεραι ἐλπίδες,= ἐς ὑμᾶς, [Refs]; ἐλπίδ᾽ ἔχω, ={ἐλπίζω}, with future infinitive, μὴ οὐ δώσειν δίκην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with aorist infinitive, κλέος εὑρέσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] and future infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἐλπίδι εἰμί, with future infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐλπίς [ἐστί] μοι with accusative and future infinitive or aorist, ἐλπίς τις αὐτὸν ἥξειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with present infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐλπίδας μεγάλας ἔν τινι ἔχειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίν᾽…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐλπίς

elpis

from a primary elpo (to anticipate, usually with pleasure);

expectation (abstractly or concretely) or confidence:--faith, hope.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐλπίς, ίδος, ἡ

n.f.

hope, expectation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐλπίς elpis 53x

pr. expectation; hope, Acts 24:15; Rom. 5:4; meton. the object of hope, thing hoped for, Rom. 8:24; Gal. 5:5; the author or source of hope, Col. 1:27; 1 Tim. 1:1; trust, confidence, 1 Pet. 1:21; ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι, in security, with a guarantee, Acts 2:26; Rom. 8:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐλπίς ἔλπω hope, expectation, Od.;in pl., πολλῶν ῥαγεισῶν ἐλπίδων after the wreck of many hopes, Aesch.;—with gen. both of subject and object, Πελοποννησίων τὴν ἐλπίδα τοῦ ναυτικοῦ the hope of the P. in their navy, Thuc.

the object of hope, a hope, Ὀρέστης, ἐλπὶς δόμων Aesch.

apprehension, fear, id. Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hop:

1. In the Old Testament:

In the Revised Version (British and American) the New Testament "hope" represents the noun elpis (52 t), and the verb elpizo (31 t). King James Version, however, renders the noun in Heb 10:23 by "faith," and for the verb gives "trust" in 18 cases (apparently without much system, e.g. in Php 2 compare 2:19 and 23; see TRUST), while in Lu 6:35 it translates apelpizo, by "hoping for nothing again" (the Revised Version (British and American) "never despairing"). But in the Old Testament there is no Hebrew word that has the exact force of "expectation of some good thing," so that in the King James Version "hope" (noun and vb.) stands for some 15 Hebrew words, nearly all of which in other places are given other translation (e.g. mibhTach, is rendered "hope"…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Hope

One of the three main elements of Christian character (1 Cor. 13:13). It is joined to faith and love, and is opposed to seeing or possessing (Rom. 8:24; 1 John 3:2). “Hope is an essential and fundamental element of Christian life, so essential indeed, that, like faith and love, it can itself designate the essence of Christianity (1 Pet. 3:15; Heb. 10:23). In it the whole glory of the Christian vocation is centred (Eph. 1:18; 4:4).” Unbelievers are without this hope (Eph. 2:12;

→ General scriptures concerning Ps 9:18; 16:9; 31:24; 33:18,22; 38:15; 39:7; 43:5; 71:5,14; 78:5-7; 119:74,81,116,166; 130:7; 146:5; Pr 10:28; 13:12; 14:32; 23:18; 24:14; Isa 38:18; Jer 17:7; La 3:21,24,26; Ho 2:15; Joe 3:16; Zec 9:12; Ac 23:6; 24:14,15; 26:7,8; 28:20; Ro 4:18; 5:2-5; 8:24,25; 12:12; 15:4,13;

- In God

Ps 39:7; 1Pe 1:21

- In Christ

1Co 15:19; 1Ti 1:1

- In God's promises

Ac 26:6,7; Tit 1:2

- In the mercy of God

Ps 33:18

- Is the work of the Holy Spirit

Ro 15:13; Ga 5:5

- OBTAINED THROUGH

. Grace

2Th 2:16

. The word

Ps 119:81

. Patience and comfort of the Scriptures

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%hope
hope100% · 53×

53 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial42%object30%subject21%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 53 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oγάρforγραφήa writing, passa
ἐπί
κατασκηνόωI encamp, tabernνῦνnow, already, atἐλπίςhope, expectatio
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀποκαραδοκίαeager expectatioαἰώνιοςeternal, unendinσύ
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
μένωI remain, abideἐκ
περί
Φαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
ἐλπίςof [our] hope53×
what comes after →
Article the
δόξαhonor, renown, gκλῆσιςa calling, summoἐργασίαworking, activit
ἐγώ
βέβαιοςfirm, steadfast,ὅτιthat, since, bec
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀνάστασιςa rising again, ἐπιφάνειαappearing, manif
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
εἰς
δέbut, on the other ha
βλέπωI look, seeἔχωI have, hold, po

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐλπίς · 53× in the New Testament
Romans Acts Hebrews 1 Thessalonians 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians Titus 1 John 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 55 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 155c. AD 40

ὡς δὲ εἶδε ῥέπουσαν μὲν ἐπὶ πανουργίαν, εὐσεβείας δὲ καὶ ὁσιότητος ὀλιγωροῦσαν, ἐξ ὧν ἡ ἀθάνατος ζωὴ περιγίνεται, προὐβάλετο κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς καὶ ἐφυγάδευσεν ἐκ τοῦ παραδείσου, μηδ’ ἐλπίδα τῆς εἰσαῦθις ἐπανόδου δυσίατα καὶ ἀθεράπευτα πλημμελούσῃ ψυχῇ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.90c. AD 75–95

ἔπειτα τῆς λάρνακος περὶ ἄκραν τινὰ ὄρους σταθείσης κατὰ τὴν Ἀρμενίαν συνεὶς ὁ Νῶχος ἀνοίγει τʼ αὐτὴν καὶ θεασάμενος γῆν βραχεῖαν περὶ αὐτὴν ἐπὶ χρηστοτέρας ἤδη γεγονὼς ἐλπίδος ἠρέμει.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Bad. 2 35Ptolemais Hermeiu (Thinites)AD 87

Περιφεράγαθος μὴ ἀμελήσῃ, ἐὰν δύνηται, ἡμῖν ἐνέγκαι καὶ υἱὸν καὶ γλ … … γίγνωσκε ἐλπίδα ἀνευρετικὸν ποιεῖν. ἔρχου σὺν Ταήσι ἀστομάχητος, ἐὰν ἀνέλθῃ. μὴ ἀμελήσῃς τὰ ἄλλα …να μοι

P.Oxy. 50 3555OxyrhynchosAD 1–AD 200

πόλεως. θεραπαινίδιόν μου οἰκογενές, οὗ ἔστιν ὄνομα Πεῖνα, ἠγάπησα καὶ ἐτημέλησα ὡς θυγάτριον ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι τοῦ ἡλικίας γενόμενον ἔχειν με γηροβοσκόν, γυναῖκα ἀβοήθητον οὖσαν καὶ μόνην. τοῦτο δὲ διάγον

P.Oxy. 18 2190OxyrhynchosAD 100

γάρ, ἐπιζητῶν φιλόλογον, καὶ Χαιρήμονα τὸν καθηγητὴν καὶ Δίδυμον τὸν τοῦ Ἀριστοκλέους, παρʼ οἷς ἐλπὶς ἦν καὶ ἐμέ τι κατορθῶσαι, οὐκέτι ἐν τῆι πόλει εὗρον, ἀλλὰ καθάρματα, παρʼ οἷς

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
μέχριmechri until G3360 Adverb
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Until means up to a certain point in time or place, like in Matthew 11:23 and Romans 5:14, where it talks about something happening until a specific time.
Tyndale gloss
until
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μέχρι (mechri) functions as a preposition with the genitive, meaning 'until' or 'as far as.' It covers various uses, including place, time, and measure, and can also serve as a conjunction. The New Testament uses it in verses like Matthew 11:23 and Romans 15:19. There is some variation in spelling, with μέχρις also appearing.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέχρι

(bef. consonants, exc. Lk 16:16, μέχρι Ἰωάνου) and μέχρις (bef. vowels, Mk 13:30, Ga 4:19, He 12:4; v. Bl., § 5, 4),

as prep., c. gen., as far as, even to, until;

of place: Ro 15:19;

of time: Mt 11:23 13:30 28:15, Lk 16:16, Ac 10:30 20:7, Ro 5:14, I Ti 6:14, He 3:6, 14 9:10;

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέχρι (mechri) — until.

μέχρῐ,

and μέχρῐς, adverb as far as, so used chiefly in Prose and before a preposition, μέχρι πρός.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. ὅποι.. [Refs]; μ. ὅπου.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. νῦν (variant{τοῦ νῦν}) [Refs 1st c.BC+]; μέχρι πότε χηρεύομε; [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. preposition with genitive, even to, as far as,

II.1. of Place, μέχρι θαλάσσης [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely following its case, ὀμφαλοῦ μ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. of Time, τέο μέχρι; i.e. τίνος μέχρι χρόνο; how long? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μέχρις τε; [Refs 7th c.BC+]; μέχρι οὗ, μέχρι ὅσου, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τοσούτου, ἕως ἂν.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] up to my time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τῆς ἐκείνου ζόης till the end of his life, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέχρι μεχρίς μέχρι μεχρίς

mechri

or mechris mekh-ris'

from 3372; as far as, i.e. up to a certain point (as a preposition, of

extent (denoting the terminus, whereas 891 refers especially to the

space of time or place intervening) or conjunction):--till, (un-)to,

until.

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 891

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέχρι

Adv

as far as, until

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέχρι mechri 17x

improper prep. and a conj (until), can also spelled μέχρις, unto, even to, Rom. 15:19; of time, until, till, Mt. 11:23; Mk. 13:30

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέχρι to a given point, even so far,

before a prep. μέχρι πρός, Lat. usque ad, Plat.:—so before Advs., μ. δεῦρο τοῦ λόγου id. Plat.; μ. τότε Thuc.

serving as a prep. c. gen. even to, as far as,

of Place, μέχρι θαλάσσης Il.; μ. τῆς πόλεως Thuc.

of Time, τέο μέχρις; i. e. τινός μέχρι χρόνου; Lat. quousque? how long? Il.; so, μέχρι οὗ; μέχρι ὅσου; Hdt.; with the Art., τὸ μ. ἐμεῦ up to my time, id. Hdt.

of Measure or Degree, μ. σοῦ δικαίου so far as consists with right, Thuc.; μ. τοῦ δυνατοῦ Plat.

with Numbers, up to, about, nearly, sometimes without altering the case of the Subst., μέχρι τριάκοντα ἔτη Aeschin.

in ionic, μέχρι οὗ is sometimes used like the simple μέχρι, μέχρι οὗ ὀκτὼ πύργων Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%until
until67% · 12×unto28% · 5×even to6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial89%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἄνDisj
μένωI remain, abide
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
παρά
οὗτος
γενεάa generation
προφήτηςa prophet, poet
Article the
ἡμέραa day
τέταρτοςfourth
μέχριuntil18×
what comes after →
Article the
σήμερονtoday, nowἸλλυρικόνIllyricumἐπιφάνειαappearing, manif
ὅς
οὗτοςμορφόωI form, fashion,
θάνατοςdeath
θάνατοςdeathἐγγίζωI come near, app
τέλοςan end, purpose, tax
βέβαιοςfirm, steadfast,
ἸωάννηςJohn
ἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέχρι · 18× in the New Testament
Hebrews Acts Matthew Philippians Romans 1 Timothy 2 Timothy Ephesians Galatians Luke Mark
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 50c. AD 40

τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐν ἐπιπέδῳ τρίγωνον ἵσταται μέχρι τριάδος, τὸ δ’ ἐπιτεθὲν τετράδα μὲν ἐν ἀριθμοῖς, ἐν δὲ σχήμασι πυραμίδα γεννᾷ, στερεὸν ἤδη σῶμα.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 4.9c. AD 96

ζῆλος ἐποίησεν Ἰωσὴφ μέχρι θανάτου διωχθῆναι καὶ μέχρι δουλείας εἰσελθεῖν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

οὕτως ὑπὸ γε… ς δεομένων δὲ τῶν … ντων ὑμῶν διαλήψεως … καὶ οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

συνγενόμενοι Ὥρωι Ψεν … λειτουργῶι μέχρι τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

τόπον καὶ προιστάμενος· τοὺς δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
τέλουςtelos end G5056 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
41× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The goal or end result is the point aimed at as a limit, like the conclusion of an act or state. In the Bible, it refers to the termination or result of something, as seen in Luke 1:33 and 1 Corinthians 10:11.
Tyndale gloss
goal/tax
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τέλος (telos) refers to an end or limit, often indicating the conclusion of an action or state. It can denote various types of endings, such as the completion of a task, the final stage of an event, or even a tax or duty. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like the end of the age (Matthew 24:6) and the fulfillment of the law (Romans 10:4). The term is also used in phrases indicating continuity or reaching a goal.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέλος, -ους, τό

[in LXX for קֵץ, etc.; εἰς τὸ τ., chiefly for לָנֶצַח and cognate forms ;]

end: most freq. of the termination or limit of an act or state (in NT also of the end of a period of time, cl. τελευτή), Lk 1:33, I Co 10:11, II Co 3:13, I Pe 4:7; by meton., of one who makes an end, Ro 10:4; ἕως (ἄχρι, μέκρι) τέλους, I Co 1:8, II Co 1:13, He 3:14 6:11, Re 2:26; εἰς τ., to or at…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέλος, -ους, τό, [cf. Curtius § 238], fr. Hom. down, Sept. mostly for ΤΡ; 1. end, i.e. a. termination, the limit at which a thing ceases to be, (in the Grk. writ. always of the end of some act or state, but not of the end of a period of time, which they call τελευτή ; in the Scriptures also of a temporal end; an end in space is everywhere called πέρας) : τῆς βασιλείας, Lk. i. 33; ζωῆς, Heb. vii. 3; rod καταργουμένου, 2 Co. iii. 13; τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων, 1 Co. x. 11 (τέλος τῶν ἡμερῶν, Neh. xiii. 6; τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐτῶν; 2 K. viii. 3; ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος καὶ μεσότης χρόνων, τέλος θ Sap. vii. 18); i. 4. he who puts an end to: τέλος νόμου Χριστός, Christ has brought the law to an end (πᾶσίν ἐστιν ἀνθρώποις τέλος τοῦ βίου θάνατος, Dem. 1306, 25), Ro. x. 4; οἵ. Fritzsche ad loc., vol. ii. p. 877 586. πάντων τὸ τέλος, the end of all things (i. 6. of the present order of things), 1 Pet. iv. 7; also in the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τέλος (1) “end”: P Eleph 113 (B.c. 311-0) (= Selections, p. 3) ἐγ δίκης κατὰ νόμον τέλος ἐχούσης, ‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,” P Petr II, 40(α) 33 (iii/B.c.) (=Witkowski*, p. 41) ἡ ἐλεφαντηγὸΓ[ς] (“the elephant-transport”) ἡ ἐν Βερενίκηι τέλος ἔχει (= τετέλεσται), P Leid {50 (st half ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 124) τέλος ἔχει πάντα, παρὲξ τῆς ἐπιγραφῆς (cf. Lk 2257, Field WVo/es, p. 76). The various prepositional phrases formed with τέλος may be illustrated by P Petr II. 13(19)® (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski?, p. 19) τὴν πᾶσαν σπουδὴν πόησαι [το]ῦ ἀφεθῆναί σε διὰ τέλους, P Tebt I. 3811 (B.c. 113) (=Chrest. I. p. 363) τῆς ἐγλήμψεως els τέλος καταλελ[ειμμέν]ης, ‘my enterprise has been made a complete failure ’’ (Edd.) (cf. 1 Thess 215 with Milligan’s note, and Jn 13! with the discussion in Abbott 7G, p- 247 ff), OGZS go! (Rosetta-stone—B.C. 196) τινὰς μὲν eis τέλος ἀφῆκεν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τέλος (telos) — goal/tax.

τέλος, εος, τό,

(τέλλομαι, τέλλω) coming to pass, performance, consummation, εἰ γὰρ ἐπ᾽ ἀρῇσιν τ. ἡμετέρῃσι γένοιτο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δίκη δ᾽ ὑπὲρ ὕβριος ἴσχει ἐς τ. ἐξελθοῦσα issuing in fulfilment, execution,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; καθήκει νῦν [τὰν γνώμαν] ἐπὶ τέλος ἀχθῆμεν [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἔλπομαι μέν, ἐν θεῷ γε μὰν τ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; result, τ. δ᾽ οὔ πώ τι πέφανται [Refs 8th c.BC+] the coming to pass (outbreak) of.., [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; τί μὰν ἀφήσει τ.; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί ἔσται τὸ τ. τῶν γιγνομένων τούτων ἐμο; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀποίητον.. θέμεν ἔργων τ. undo things done, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁδοῦ τ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φόνου τ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; τῷ τ. πίστιν φέρων the outcome, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ζεὺς πάντων ἐφορᾷ τ. [Refs 6th c.BC+]; μάχης.. κεκύρωται τ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; διὰ μάχης ἥξω τέλους, ={διὰ μάχης ἥξω}, [Refs]; ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τ.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέλος

telos

from a primary tello (to set out for a definite point or goal);

properly, the point aimed at as a limit, i.e. (by implication) the

conclusion of an act or state (termination (literally, figuratively or

indefinitely), result (immediate, ultimate or prophetic), purpose);

specially, an impost or levy (as paid):--+ continual, custom,

end(-ing), finally, uttermost. Compare 5411.

see GREEK for 5411

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέλος, ους, τό

n.n.

an end, purpose, tax

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τέλος telos 40x

an end attained, consummation; an end, closing act, Mt. 24:6, 14; 1 Cor. 15:24; full performance, perfect discharge, Rom. 10:4; fulfillment, realization, Lk. 22:37; final dealing, developed issue, Jas. 5:11; issue, final stage, 1 Cor. 10:11; issue, result, Mt. 26:58; Rom. 6:21, 22; 1 Pet. 1:9; antitypical issue, 2 Cor. 3:13; practical…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τέλος τέλος, ος, εος, τό, the fulfilment or completion of anything, Lat. effectus, i.e. its consummation, issue, result, end, Hom., etc.; τ. πολέμου its issue, Il.; τ. ἐπιτιθέναι τινί to put a finish to a thing, i. e. give it effect, id. Il.; τ. ἐπιγίγνεται ἀρῇσι one's prayers are accomplished, Od.:— τέλος ἔχειν to have reached the end, to be finished or ready, Il.; τ. ἔχει δαίμων ὅπα θέλει the deity keeps the result in his own power, Eur.:— τ. λαβεῖν to be completed, Plat.

esp. of the end of life, τὸ τ. βίου, Soph., Eur.; and without βίου, the end, death, Hdt.

periphr. in various phrases, τέλος θανάτου the point or term of death, Lat. exitus mortis, Hom.; so, τ. γάμοιο ῀ γάμος, Od., etc.

Adverbial usages:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

qets, 'ephec, kalah; telos, sunteleo:

The end of anything is its termination, hence, also, final object or purpose.

It is the translation of several Hebrew and Greek words, chiefly in the Old Testament of qets (properly, "a cutting off") and other words from the same root (Ge 6:13, "The end of all flesh is come before me"); 'acharith, "hinder part," is also frequently translated "end" (De 11:12; Ps 37:37,38, American Revised Version: "There is a happy end to the man of peace .... The end of the wicked shall be cut off"; the English Revised Version "latter end" (Ps 37:37), margin "reward" or "future posterity"; Ps 73:17

Easton's Bible Dictionary

End

In Heb. 13:7, is the rendering of the unusual Greek word ekbasin, meaning “outcome”, i.e., death. It occurs only elsewhere in 1 Cor. 10:13, where it is rendered “escape.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%end
end74% · 31×outcome10% · 4×revenue5% · 2×ends2% · 1×utmost2% · 1×goal2% · 1×custom2% · 1×end!2% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

42 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial34%subject34%object22%predicate7%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 41 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ὅςκαίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist
εἰς
ὑπομένωI remain behind,μήNegκόσμοςthe world, unive
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
ἕωςuntil, as far as
σύὅτιthat, since, bec
μέχριas far as, until
ἐλπίςhope, expectatioὑπόστασιςassurance, subst
τέλοςend41×
what comes after →
Article the
τέλοςan end, purpose,Article theαἰώνan age, a cycle
οὗτος
σῴζωI save, heal
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ἀφομοιόωI assimilate, ma
βέβαιοςfirm, steadfast, end
κατέχωI hold fast, bin
Disj
κῆνσοςa poll-tax

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέλος · 41× in the New Testament
Matthew Hebrews Romans 1 Peter Luke 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Mark Revelation 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy James
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 44c. AD 40

οὗ χάριν καὶ ἀρχὴν πρὸς τέλος ἦγε καὶ ἐπέσπευδε καὶ τέλος ἐπ’ ἀρχὴν ἀνακάμπτειν ἐποίει·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.6c. AD 100

Τρία οὖν δόγματά ἐστιν κυρίου: ζωῆς ἐλπίς, ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος πίστεως ἡμῶν: καὶ δικαιοσύνη, κρίσεως ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος: ἀγάπη εὐφροσύνης καὶ ἀγαλλιάσεως ἔργων δικαιοσύνης μαρτυρία.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC

δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς προκειμένης συγγραφῆς, ἃς ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Ὥρου τοῦ Θοτορταίου χαλκοῦ ταλάντων ε, τέλος Γ. Ἀπολλώνιος τραπεζίτης.

P.Grenf. 2 32Pathyris102 BC

διὰ τῆς προκειμένης συνγραφῆς, ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανεβχούνιος πρὸς χαλκοῦ τάλαντα β, τέλος Ασ, γίνονται χαλκοῦ δραχμαὶ Ασ. Πάνισκος τραπεζίτης.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

γειτνίαι δεδηλῶνται, ὃν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Νεχούτου τοῦ Σχώτου ἱερέως Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης χαλκοῦ Γ, τέλος τ. Παγκράτης.

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
βεβαίανbebaios unshakable G949 Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for firm means stable or secure, as in Hebrews 6:19. It describes something that is sure and dependable. This word is used to express confidence in God's promises.
Tyndale gloss
firm
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

βέβαιος (i.e., bebaios) means firm, stable, or secure, and is derived from the root of βαίνω (to walk). It covers a range of meanings from physical steadiness to metaphorical certainty, especially in legal contexts. The New Testament uses it in various passages, including Hebrews 6:19 and Romans 4:16, to convey the idea of guaranteed security.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** βέβαιος, -ον (also -α, -ον;

< βαίνω),

[in LXX: Es 3:13, Wi 7:23, III Mac 5:31 7:7, IV Mac 17:4*;]

firm, secure: ἄγκυρα, He 6:19; metaph., sure (esp. "in the sense of legally guaranteed security," Deiss., BS, 109; cf . two foll. words): ἐπαγγελία, Ro 4:16; ἐλπίς, II Co 1:6; λόγος, He 2:2; παρρησία, He 3:6; ἀρχή (τ. ὑποστάσεως), He 3:14; διαθήκη, He 9:17; κλῆσις κ. ἐκλογή, II Pe 1:10; comp. (-ότερος), προφητικὸς λόγος, II Pe…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βέβαιος, -αία (W. 69 (67); B. 25 (22)), -aov, (BAQ, Baive), [fr. Aeschyl. down], stable, fast, firm; prop. : ἄγκυpa, Heb. vi. 19; metaph. sure, trusty: ἐπαγγελία, Ro. τν. 16; κλῆσις καὶ ἐκλογή, 2 Pet. i. 10; λόγος προφητικός. 2 Pet. i. 19; unshaken, constant, Heb. iii. 14; ἐλπίς, 2 Co. i. 7 (6), (4 Mace. xvii. 4) ; παρρησία, Heb. iii. 6 (but WH Tr mrg. in br.) ; valid and therefore inviolable, λόγος, Heb. ii. 2; διαθήκη, Heb. ix. 17. (With the same meanings in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βέβαιος. Deissmann (8S, p. τος ἢ.) has shown very fully how much force the technical use of this word and its cognates to denote legally guaranteed security adds to their occurrence in the NT. Thus with the use of this adjective in Rom 415, 2 Cor 17, we may compare P Amh II. 8574 (a.p. 78) where, in an application for a lease, provision is made that if no objection is raised ‘‘the lease may remain guaranteed to us for the period of five years without change ’—pévye ἡμῖν ἡ μίσθωσις βεβαία ἐπὶ τὸν πενταετ[ἢ] χρόνον ἀμεθεστάτους (Δ -οις). Ρ Strass I. 2253. (iii/A.p.) ἔχειν tld] βέβαιον τοὺς κατασχόντας, ‘that those who have obtained possession may be secured in it,” P Oxy IX. 120079 (A.D. 266) ἔτι τε kal παρέξομαί σοι βέβαια διὰ παντὸς ἀπὸ πάντων πάσῃ βεβαιώσει, ‘and I will further guarantee the property always against all claims with every guarantee” (Ed.), BGU IV. 1116%4 (B.C. 13)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βέβαιος (bebaios) — firm.

βέβαιος, ον

(so always in [Refs 5th c.BC+], also α, ον (see. below): (βαίνω):— firm, steady, κρύσταλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γῆ β. terra firma, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; steadfast, durable, ὁμιλία.. πιστὴ καὶ βέβαιος [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__b sure, certain, τέκμαρ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πύλας β. παρέχειν make safe, secure, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βεβαιότερος κίνδυνος a surer game, [Refs]: superlative -ότατος[Refs]; βέβαιόν ἐστί τινι ὅτι.. [Refs 1st c.BC+] confirm, guarantee, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. of persons, etc., steadfast, constant, φίλος [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, βεβαιότεροι μηδὲν νεωτεριεῖν more certain to make no change, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βέβαιος

bebaios

from the base of 939 (through the idea of basality); stable (literally

or figuratively):--firm, of force, stedfast, sure.

see GREEK for 939

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βέβαιος, α, ον

Adj

firm, steadfast, enduring

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βέβαιος bebaios 8x

firm, stable, steadfast, Heb. 3:14; 6:19; sure, certain, established, Rom. 4:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βέβαιος βαίνω firm, steady, steadfast, sure, certain, Aesch., etc.; βεβαιότερος κίνδυνος a surer game, Thuc.

of persons, steadfast, steady sure, constant, Aesch., etc.; c. inf., βεβαιότεροι μηδὲν νεωτεριεῖν more certain to make no change, Thuc.

τὸ βέβαιον certainty, firmness, resolution, Hdt., Thuc.

adv. -ως, Aesch., etc.; comp. -ότερον, Thuc.; Sup. -ότατα, id. Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%sure
sure25% · 2×unshakable25% · 2×unalterable13% · 1×firm13% · 1×affirmed13% · 1×more certain13% · 1×

8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate44%adverbial33%second object22%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
τέλοςan end, purpose, tax
μέχριas far as, until
εἰμίI am, exist
Article the
ἐγώ
ἐλπίςhope, expectatio
γίνομαιI come into being, a
λόγοςa word, speech,
καίand, even, also, nam
τέDisj
βέβαιοςunshakable
what comes after →
Article the
ἐπαγγελίαa promiseπροφητικόςprophetic
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
κατέχωI hold fast, bind, r
ὑπέρ
σύ
ἐπείafter, for, since, o
μήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβέβαιος · 9× in the New Testament
Hebrews 2 Peter 2 Corinthians Romans
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.89c. AD 40

ᾧ δὲ παρέχει ὁ θεὸς ἐπιστήμην βεβαίαν, τούτῳ δίδωσιν ἀμφότερα, ἐργάζεσθαί τε τὰς ἀρετὰς καὶ μηδέποτε αὐτῶν ἀφίστασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἀεὶ ταμιεύειν καὶ φυλάττειν ἑκάστην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.190c. AD 75–95

οὕτως τε τοῦ βασιλέως πάσης αὐτῶν τῆς περιουσίας κυρίου γεγενημένου, μετῳκίσθησαν ἄλλος ἀλλαχοῦ, ὅπως βεβαία γένηται τῷ βασιλεῖ τῆς χώρας τούτων ἡ κτῆσις, πλὴν τῶν ἱερέων·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 1.2c. AD 96

τίς γὰρ παρεπιδημήσας πρὸς ὑμᾶς τὴν πανάρετον καὶ βεβαίαν ὑμῶν πίστιν οὐκ ἐδοκίμασεν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 5th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Mich. Zen. 45Arsinoites253 BC

ὑμᾶς δεῖ τὰ ἔργα συντελοῦντας τὰ ἐν τῶι παραδείσωι ἀναλίσκειν , παρὰ τούτων τὰ βέβαια λαβεῖν. ὡς δ' ὰν κατεργασθῇ ὁ παράδεισος, καὶ καθαρῶ αὐτόν. Πετιμούθης μὲν καὶ οἱ

PSI 15 1533OxyrhynchitesAD 201–AD 250

καὶ ἀποφέρεσθαι ὑμᾶς τὰ περιεσόμενα ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ἔτους, ἅπερ καὶ ἐπάναγκον παρέξομαι ὑμῖν βέβαια … … … … … … ου εἰς τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον

P.Col. 7 180Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 315–AD 316

ἥμισυ μέρος ἐμοὶ τῷ γεωργοῦντι τῆς εὐτυχούσης τετάρτης δ ἰνδικτίονος. ἡ μίσθωσις κυρία καὶ βεβαία καὶ ἔστω πανταχοῦ ἐπιφερομένη καὶ ἐπερωτηθεὶς ὡμολόγησα. Αὐρήλιος Πατερμοῦθις ὁ προκίμενος μεμίσθωκα τῷ Αὐρηλίῳ

Christ however as [the] Son over the house of Him, whose house are we ourselves if indeed <the> [our] confidence and the boast <the> of [our] hope until end unshakable we may hold.
κατάσχωμεν.¶katechō we may hold. G2722 Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · first person · plural
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To hold back means to keep or restrain something, like in Luke 8:15 and Romans 1:18. It can also mean to possess or have control over something, like in 1 Corinthians 7:30 and 1 Thessalonians 5:21.
Amplified meaning
to possess or have
Tyndale gloss
to hold back/fast
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατέχω is built from the prefix κατ- and the verb ἔχω, meaning to hold or possess. It encompasses a range of meanings including to hold fast, restrain, and detain. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as retaining faith (1 Thessalonians 5:21) and restraining evil (2 Thessalonians 2:6-7). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατ-έχω,

[in LXX for אחז, חזק hi., etc.;]

perfective of ἔχω (M, Pr., 116; M, Th., 155),

to possess, hold fast: Lk 8:15, Jo 5:[4], Ro 1:18 (Lft., Notes, 251), I Co 7:30 11:2, II Co 6:10, I Th 5:21, He 3:6, 14 10:23;

to lay hold of, get possession of: Lk 14:9.

to hold back, detain, restrain (M, Th., 156 f.): c. acc. seq. τοῦ μή c. inf., Lk 4:42; seq. πρός, c. acc., Phm 13; absol., τὸ κατέχον (ὁ κ.), II Th…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατέχω; impf. κατεῖχον; 2 aor. subjunc. κατάσχω; impf. pass. κατειχόμην ; 1. to hold back, detain, retain; a. τινά, from going away, foll. by τοῦ μή w. inf., Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 8.; οἵ. W. 604 (561)]; τινὰ πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, Philem. 13. Pass. (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; ef. Passow 8. v. p. 1677*; [L. and 5. 5. ν. II. 67), of some troublesome condition or circumstance by which one is held as it were bound: νοσήματι, Jn. v. 4[GT Tr WHom. the passage]; ἔν τινι, Ro. vii. 6. b. to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of): τ. ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ, Ro. i. 18; absol. τὸ κατέχον, that which hinders, se. Antichrist from making his appearance (see avrixpiotos); the power of the Roman empire is meant; 6 κατέχων he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Antichrist, denotes the one in whom that power is lodged, the Roman emperor: 2 Th. ii. 6 sq. (cf., besides De Wette and Liinemann ad…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατέχω royal ordinance—s.c. 118) κρατεῖν ὧν κατεσχήκασι κλή(ρων), ‘shall have the legal ownership of the lands which they have possessed ” (Edd.), P Oxy II. 237 Vili 22 (a.p, 186) διαζητοῦντί μοι μαθεῖν ἐκ τίνος ὑποθέσεως ἐτελεῖτο τὰς Αἰγυπτιακὰς γυναῖκας κατὰ ἐνχώριον νόμιμα (/ νόμισμα) κατέχειν τὰ ὑπάρχοντα τῶν ἀνδρῶν διὰ τῶν γαμικῶν συνγραφῶν κτλ., ‘when I wished to know on what pretext it came about that Egyptian wives have by native Egyptian law a claim upon their husbands’ property through their marriage contracts” etc. (Edd.). Cf. also P Oxy IV. γ7γ1315 (A.D. 97) where the parents κατέσχον τῇ ἐξ ἀλλήλων γενεᾷ τὰ ἑαυτῶν πάντα, ‘settled upon their joint issue the whole of their property” (Edd.). (2) From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ lay hold of,” ‘* take possession of,’ as in Lk 14%: see e.g. P Amh II. 3076 (ii/B.c.) where in an official report regarding the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατέχω (katechō) — to hold back/fast.

κατέχω,

future καθέξω (of duration) [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist κατέσχον, poetry

__A κατέσχεθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. singular κάσχεθε [Refs 8th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect κατέσκ [εθε] [Refs 7th c.BC+]; late aorist κατέσχα [Refs 4th c.AD+]

__A.I transitive, hold fast, καλύπτρην χείρεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.b hold back, withhold, εἴ με βίῃ ἀέκοντα καθέξει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: check, restrain, bridle, ἑωυτόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [γυναῖκε] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀργήν, θυμόν, ὕβριν, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τὴν ἀγωγήν put it off, [Refs]; κ. τὸ πλῆθος ἐλευθέρως, ἰσχύϊ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὖρον hold in, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἑαυτὸν κατέχει μὴ ἐπιπηδᾶν restrains himself from.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be held down, γλῶσσα κατείχετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to be bound…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατέχω

katecho

from 2596 and 2192; to hold down (fast), in various applications

(literally or figuratively):--have, hold (fast), keep (in memory),

let, X make toward, possess, retain, seize on, stay, take, withhold.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατέχω

v.

I hold fast, bind, restrain

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατέχω katechō 17x

(1) transitive, to hold down; to detain, retain, Lk. 4:42; Rom. 1:18; Phlm. 13; to hinder, restrain, 2 Thess. 2:6, 7; to hold downright, hold in a firm grasp, to have in full and secure possession, 1 Cor. 7:30; 2 Cor. 6:10; to come into full possession of, seize upon; to keep, retain, 1 Thess. 5:21; to occupy, Lk. 14:9; met. to hold fast mentally, retain, Lk. 8:15; 1 Cor. 11:2; 15:2…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κατέχω fut. καθέξω fut. κατασχήσω aor2 κατέσχον poet. κατέσχεθον epic 3rd sg. κάσχεθε trans. to hold fast, Hes.

to hold back, withhold, Hom.:— to check, restrain, control, bridle, Hdt., attic: —Pass. to be held down, to be bound, kept under, Hdt.

to detain, id. Hdt., Xen.:—Pass. to be detained, to stay, stop, tarry, Hdt., Soph.

to have in possession, possess, occupy, Trag.

of sound, to fill, ἀλαλητῷ πεδίον κατέχουσι Il.; κ. στρατόπεδον δυσφημίαις to fill it with his grievous cries, Soph.

βιοτὰν κ. to continue a life, id. Soph.

to occupy, be spread over, cover, νὺξ κάτεχ᾽ οὐρανόν Od.; ἡμέρα κατέσχε γαῖαν Aesch.:—in Mid., κατέσχετο πρόσωπα covered her face, Od.

of the grave, to confine, cover, Hom.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAS-1P — Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · first person · plural
second aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAS-1P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: first Number: Plural

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hold: In the American Standard Revised Version frequently "stronghold" (Jud 9:49; 1Sa 22:4; 24:22; 2Sa 5:17; 23:14; 1Ch 11:16; 12:16). See FORTIFICATION. In Re 18:2 for the King James Version "cage" (phulake) the Revised Version (British and American) substitutes, as in first clause, "hold," and in the margin "prison."

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Hold

A fortress, the name given to David’s lurking-places (1 Sam. 22:4, 5; 24:22).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
11%possessing
possessing11% · 2×restraining11% · 2×keep11% · 2×they were making6% · 1×suppressing6% · 1×we were bound6% · 1×you are keeping6% · 1×you hold fast6% · 1×other renderings39% · 7×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
νῦνnow, already, atμόνοςalone, but, only
βέβαιοςfirm, steadfast, end
τέλοςan end, purpose,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτός
λόγοςa word, speech, divi
Article the
τόποςa place
ἔσχατοςlast, at the las
κατέχωwe may hold.18×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
καρποφορέωI bear fruit
νόσημαa trouble, disease
εἰς
Article the
ὥστεso that, therefore
δουλεύωI am a slave, am

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατέχω · 18× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Hebrews Luke 2 Thessalonians Romans 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians Acts John Philemon
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Flight and Finding 151c. AD 40

ἀπέστειλεν οὖν τὸν ἔριφον κομίσασθαι τὸν ἀρραβῶνα παρὰ τῆς γυναικός, οὐ τοῦτο προῃρημένος πάντως ἀπολαβεῖν, ἀλλ’ εἴ ποτε ἀναξία τοῦ κατέχειν ἐκείνη γένοιτο.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.21c. AD 75–95

οὕτως δʼ αὐτοὺς Ῥουβῆλος ὁρῶν ἔχοντας ὁ πρεσβύτατος αὐτῶν καὶ πρὸς τὴν πρᾶξιν ὡμονοηκότας ἐπειρᾶτο κατέχειν ὑποδεικνὺς τὸ μέγεθος τοῦ τολμήματος καὶ τὸ ἐπʼ αὐτῷ μύσος,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
BGU 4 1148Alexandria14 BC

προσεληλυθέναι αφ … τῇ κατοχῇ αὐτοῦ ἀκολούθως τοῖς τῆς χώρας νόμοις διὰ τὸ αὐτὴν κατέχειν τὴν Διονυσίου συγγραφὴν Αἰγυπτίαν καὶ εἶναι αὐτόθεν ἀκύρους τὰς δύο συνχωρήσεις, μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι δὲ

P.Oxy. 49 3466OxyrhynchosAD 81–AD 96

δὲ Δημητρίας ὡσαύτως μετερχομένης τὸν Φανίαν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τρισχιλίας ἑξακοσίας … ν … οκα κατείχετο παρʼ ἑαυτῇ μέχρι τῆς τοῦ δανείου κομιδῆς, ἀποπεφηνότος τοῦ Κάρου ἀκολούθως τοῖς γενομένοις ὑπʼ

διαζητοῦντί μοι μαθεῖν ἔκ τινος ὑποθέσεως ἐγένετο τὰς Αἰγυπτίας γυναῖκας κατὰ τὰ ἐνχώρια νόμιμα κατέχειν τὰ ὑπάρχοντα τῶν ἀνδρῶν διὰ τῶν γαμικῶν συνγραφῶν ἑαυταῖς τε καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις, πλειστάκις

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate